HP LaserJet 3700 3700 LaserJet printer Software Technical Reference
Reklama
Reklama
software technical reference
hp LaserJet 3700
hp LaserJet 3700 series printers software technical reference
Copyright
(c) 2003 Copyright Hewlett-Packard Development
Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Edition 1, 11/2003
Trademark Credits
Adobe (R), Adobe Photoshop (R), Acrobat (R),
PostScript (R), and the Acrobat logo (R) are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries/regions.
Arial (R) is a U.S. registered trademark of the
Monotype Corporation.
AutoCAD (TM) is a U.S. trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
Corel (R) and CorelDraw (TM) are trademarks of
Corel Corporation or Corel Corporation Ltd.
Helvetica* and Times* are trademarks of Linotype-
Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and other countries/regions.
Intel (R) is a U.S. trademark of Intel Corporation.
Java (TM) is a U.S. trademark of Sun Microsystems,
Inc.
HP-UX Release 10.20 and later and P-UX RElease
11.00 and later (in both 32- and 64-bit configurations) on all HP 9000 computers are Open Group UNIX 95 branded products.
Microsoft (R), MS-DOS (R), Windows (R), and
Windows NT (R) are U.S. registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
Netscape and Netscape Navigator are trademarks or registered trademarks of Netscape Communications,
Inc.
Pentium (R) is a registered trademark of Intel
Corporation.
TrueType (TM) is a U.S. trademark of Apple
Computer, Inc.
UNIX (R) is a registered trademark of the Open Group.
Table of Contents
List of tables
List of figures
1 Purpose and scope
2 Software description
Software Technical Reference ENWW
3
4
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003..............................70
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003.................................79
Software Technical Reference ENWW
Software Technical Reference ENWW
5
6
3 Printer driver features
Software Technical Reference ENWW
Software Technical Reference ENWW
7
8
Software Technical Reference ENWW
Software Technical Reference ENWW
9
10
Software Technical Reference ENWW
4 Installing Windows printing system components
Software Technical Reference ENWW
11
12
5 Installation for Macintosh, IBM OS/2, and Linux operating systems
Folders and files added through installation of the HP Color LaserJet 3700 software (Mac OS) ...256
Software Technical Reference ENWW
6 Engineering Detail
Software Technical Reference ENWW
13
Index
14
Software Technical Reference ENWW
List of tables
Table 1: Features of the HP LaserJet 3700 printer models.................................................................24
Software Technical Reference ENWW
15
16
Software Technical Reference ENWW
Software Technical Reference ENWW
17
List of figures
18
Software Technical Reference ENWW
Software Technical Reference ENWW
19
20
Software Technical Reference ENWW
Software Technical Reference ENWW
21
22
Software Technical Reference ENWW
1
Purpose and scope
Note
Introduction
This Software Technical Reference (STR) provides information about and troubleshooting tips for the printing system software for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer.
This document is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quick-reference tool for Customer Care Center (CCC) agents, support engineers, system administrators, management information systems (MIS) personnel, and HP LaserJet printer end-users, as appropriate.
This software technical reference describes drivers that are shipped with the printing-system software CD-ROM. It does
not cover Web-based drivers that might be released for use by support personnel. The following information is included in this technical reference:
• descriptions of drivers and platforms with system modifications
• procedures for installing and uninstalling software components
• descriptions of problems that can arise while using the printer, and known solutions to those problems
An addendum to this STR includes system modification information and descriptions of known software issues and workarounds.
Note
The following table contains descriptions of the printer models that are described in this STR. The printing system software for each printer model accommodates the differences between models.
Product configurations might vary among countries/regions.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Introduction
23
HP LaserJet color 3700 series printer models
Model
3700
Memory Speed
•
64 megabytes
(MB) synchronous dynamic randomaccess memory
(SDRAM)
•
Expandable to 448 MB
RAM
•
16 pages per minute (ppm) letter-size media
• 15 ppm A4size media
Connectivity
•
Parallel connection
•
USB connection
Paper handling
•
One 100-sheet multipurpose tray
(tray 1); maximum paper size, legal
(216 mm by 356 mm, 8.5 by 14 inches)
•
One 250-sheet tray (tray 2); maximum paper size, legal
(216 mm by 356 mm, 8.5 by 14 inches)
•
Optional
500 sheet tray
(tray 3); maximum paper size, letter
(215 mm by
279 mm, 8.5 by
11 inches)
•
Optional duplexing unit for printing on both sides of the paper
Resolution and print cartridge
•
1200 dpi ProRes
•
6,000-page print cartridge
24
HP LaserJet color 3700 series printer models Software Technical Reference ENWW
Model
3700n
Memory Speed
•
64 megabytes
(MB) synchronous dynamic randomaccess memory
(SDRAM)
•
Expandable to 448 MB
RAM
•
16 pages per minute (ppm) letter-size media
•
15 ppm A4size media
Connectivity
•
Parallel connection
•
USB connection
•
HP Jetdirect
615n internal
10/100 Base-
T print server for network connectivity
Paper handling
•
One 100-sheet multipurpose tray
(tray 1); maximum paper size, legal
(216 mm by 356 mm, 8.5 by 14 inches)
•
One 250-sheet tray (tray 2); maximum paper size, legal
(216 mm by 356 mm, 8.5 by 14 inches)
•
Optional
500 sheet tray
(tray 3); maximum paper size, letter
(215 mm by
279 mm, 8.5 by
11 inches)
•
Optional duplexing unit for printing on both sides of the paper
Resolution and print cartridge
•
1200 dpi ProRes
•
6,000-page print cartridge
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP LaserJet color 3700 series printer models
25
Model
3700dn
Memory Speed
•
128 megabyte s (MB) synchronous dynamic randomaccess memory
(SDRAM)
•
Expandable to 448 MB
RAM
•
16 pages per minute (ppm) letter-size media
•
15 ppm A4size media
Connectivity
•
Parallel connection
•
USB connection
Paper handling
•
One 100-sheet multipurpose tray
(tray 1); maximum paper size, legal
(216 mm by 356 mm, 8.5 by 14 inches)
•
One 250-sheet tray (tray 2); maximum paper size, legal
(216 mm by 356 mm, 8.5 by 14 inches)
•
Optional
500 sheet tray
(tray 3); maximum paper size, letter
(215 mm by
279 mm, 8.5 by
11 inches)
•
Built-in duplexing unit for automatically printing on both sides of paper
Resolution and print cartridge
•
1200 dpi ProRes
•
6,000-page print cartridge
26
HP LaserJet color 3700 series printer models Software Technical Reference ENWW
Model Memory Speed
3700dtn
•
128 megabyte s (MB) synchronous dynamic randomaccess memory
(SDRAM)
•
Expandable to 448 MB
RAM
•
16 pages per minute (ppm) letter-size media
•
15 ppm A4size media
Connectivity
•
Parallel connection
•
USB connection
Paper handling
•
One 100-sheet multipurpose tray
(tray 1); maximum paper size, legal
(216 mm by 356 mm, 8.5 by 14 inches)
•
One 250-sheet tray (tray 2); maximum paper size, legal
(216 mm by 356 mm, 8.5 by 14 inches)
•
Standard
500 sheet tray
(tray 3); maximum paper size, letter
(215 mm by
279 mm, 8.5 by
11 inches)
•
Built-in duplexing unit for automatically printing on both sides of paper
Resolution and print cartridge
•
1200 dpi ProRes
•
6,000-page print cartridge
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP LaserJet color 3700 series printer models
27
28
HP LaserJet color 3700 series printer models Software Technical Reference ENWW
2
Software description
Introduction
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer comes with software and installers for Microsoft (R) Windows (R) and Apple
Computer, Inc., Macintosh systems. Linux, UNIX (R) and OS/2 systems are supported, and software is available on the
Web. For information about specific system installers, drivers, and components, locate the section that corresponds to that system.
Note
Supported operating systems
The following operating systems (OSs) support the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software, including standard printer command language (PCL) drivers and PostScript (R) 3 emulation (PS) drivers. Windows OSs support a fullfeatured configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer; other OSs support varying levels of functionality.
•
Windows 98
•
Windows Millennium Edition (Me)
•
Windows NT (R) (Service packs 3 through 6)
•
Windows 2000 (Service packs 1 and 2)
•
Windows XP Home Edition and Windows XP Professional (Service pack 1)
•
Windows Server 2003
Throughout this manual, Windows XP is used to denote Windows XP Home Edition, Windows XP Professional and
Windows Server 2003 unless noted otherwise.
Additional operating environments
The following operating environments also support the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing system:
•
Windows Terminal Server
•
Citrix Terminal Server
•
Windows Cluster Server
•
Mac OS 9.x and Mac OS X (10.1 or later)
•
IBM OS/2 (available at http://www.ibm.com)
•
Linux (available at http://www.hp.com/go/linux)
•
UNIX (available at http://www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software)
•
HP mobile printing driver (available at http://www.hp.com/support/mpd100)
For more information, go to: http://www.hp.com/support/lj3700.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Introduction
29
Technology background information
This section contains information about the following topics:
•
HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer drivers
•
HP Color LaserJet 3700 user documentation
•
Bidirectional communication
•
Driver Autoconfiguration
•
HP Color LaserJet Toolbox (HP Toolbox)
•
HP Embedded Web Server
•
Remote firmware update
•
Euro character
HP LaserJet printer drivers
HP LaserJet printer drivers for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer control the print settings. These printer drivers differ, depending on the operating system environment. The following drivers are available on the printing-system software
CD-ROM:
•
HP traditional PCL 6 driver for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
•
HP traditional PS driver for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
•
HP PCL 6 unidriver for Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
•
HP PS unidriver for Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
You gain access to the drivers through onscreen windows, or driver tabs, that offer dialog boxes with printer settings.
The driver tabs are available in the software application from which you send your print jobs to the printer and from your computer control panel.
The graphical user interface (GUI) of the driver tabs differs from driver to driver. The GUI of the HP traditional PS driver is significantly different from the GUI of the HP traditional PCL 6 drivers. The HP PCL 6 and HP PS unidrivers for
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 have a uniform general appearance.
See Chapter 3, "Driver features," for detailed information about each of the HP printer drivers.
HP LaserJet user documentation
Adobe(R) Acrobat Reader(R)
Note
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM includes Adobe Acrobat Reader for viewing online documentation.
When you click any of the documentation links on the HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM, the installer scans the system for an installed portable document format (PDF) reader. If the installer cannot find a reader, the installer presents the option to install the Adobe Acrobat Reader.
Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later is required to view the documents on the HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-
ROM.
30
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
HP LaserJet guides
On the CD-ROM that came with the printer, the following guides for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer are supplied in
Adobe Acrobat Reader PDF files for viewing on your computer. These guides are only available in electronic format.
•
User Reference Guide for the HP Color LaserJet 3700: A full-size, comprehensive version of the User Guide.
•
User Guide for the HP Color LaserJet 3700: An electronic copy of the printed, minimized version of the User
Reference Guide that comes with the printer and is installed inside the front doors of the printer. See the
"Installation Type" dialog box in Chapter 4, "Installing Windows system components".
You can either view the guides from the HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM or install them on your system. To view the guides from the HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM, click printer documentation on the main screen, and then click the guide you want to view. To install the online user guides, select the User Guide check box during a Custom Installation. The guide is installed in the Manuals folder on the target system. You can also choose to install the guides later, or to read the guide on the printing-system software CD-ROM by navigating to
<language>/
Manuals.
In accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Hewlett-Packard provides readable, onscreen versions of the User Reference Guide for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 at:
http://www.hp.com/support/clj3700
A hyperlinked, screen-readable version of the User Reference Guide for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 is available on the printer software CD-ROM. To view the user guide, navigate to the
<language> folder for your language, and then to the Manuals folder. There, open the file with this file name:
LJ3700_USER_REFERENCE.CHM
HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system install notes
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 Printing System Install Notes are available on the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printingsystem software CD-ROM. The install notes (file name LJ3700_INSTALL_NOTES.RTF) contain important information about printer features, instructions for installing the printing-system software, and technical assistance.
To view this text file from the HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM, click printer documentation on the main screen of the CD-ROM, and then click install notes.
You can also gain access to the file by inserting the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive, navigating to <language>, and then clicking the file name LJ3700_INSTALL_NOTES.RTF. When you have the file open in Wordpad, you can click
File, and then click Save As to save a copy of the file to another location.
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide
The Hewlett-Packard Jetdirect Administrator's Guide can be viewed from the HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-
ROM by clicking printer documentation from the installer main screen and then clicking hp jetdirect guide. The guide is installed in the Manuals folder on the target system. You can also choose to install the guide later, or to read the guide on the printing-system software CD-ROM by navigating to <language>/Manuals, and then clicking the file name HPJDAG.PDF.
HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system release notes
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 Printing-System Release notes, late-breaking information, and other technical assistance, are available at:
http://www.hp.com/support/clj3700
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
31
Bidirectional communication
Bidirectional communication is the printer capability to respond to data inquiries from the computer and report back information, such as what type of print media is available or what accessories are connected to the printer. If a printer does not have this capability (that is, if it has no bidirectional mode), it can only accept commands from the host and cannot report back information.
Driver Autoconfiguration and Device Status and Alerts use bidirectional communications software. The Typical
Installation installs Driver Autoconfiguration in supported environments that contain the bidirectional communication software. Use Custom Installation when you do not want these features.
Bidirectional communication depends on the operating system on which your network runs and on the type of connection you have between your computer and your printer.
The following tables provide information about bidirectional communication availability in various operating systems and network environments.
Table 2: Bidirectional communication availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share
Method Connection type Microsoft Windows
95 98 Me NT 4.0 2000 1
XP
1, 3
Microsoft Share
9x/NT 4.0
host
2000/XP host
1
Installer Direct connect
USB (DOT4)
Parallel
Network Jetdirect TCP/IP
IPX/SPX x
Standard TCP/IP x
(HP)
TCP/IP
(MS)
IPX/SPX
(HP) x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2
1- In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, the bidirectional-communication components that are installed for HP PCL 6 and PS unidrivers are limited to TCP/IP connections. EAC is used for autoconfiguration.
2- During installation,
Auto Configure works, but is limited to TCP/IP connections. The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 clients are connected to Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 hosts.
3- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Table 3: Bidirectional communication availability in Novell Netware environments
Method Connection type Novell
Netware 4.x Netware 5.x
Installer Bindery
NDS
NDPS
MS Netware Client
1
Novell Netware Client
MS Netware Client
1
Novell Netware Client
MS Netware Client
1
Novell Netware Client x x x x x x x x
1- Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft
Client Service for NetWare.
32
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
The following tables show the availability of Enterprise Autoconfiguration for various operating systems and network environments that support bidirectional communication.
Table 4: Enterprise Autoconfiguration availability in Microsoft Windows and Microsoft Share
Method Connection type
Installer Direct connect
USB (DOT4)
Parallel
Network Jetdirect TCP/IP
Standard TCP/IP
(HP)
TCP/IP x x
IPX/SPX x x x
Microsoft Windows
95 98 Me NT
4.0
Microsoft Share
2000 XP
3
2000/XP host with
2000/XP client
Other
1
x x x x x x
NT 4.0
host with NT
4.0 client
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 x x x x x x
2 x
2
Add
Printer
(MS)
IPX/SPX
(HP) x
Direct connect
USB
Parallel
Network Jetdirect TCP/IP x
IPX/SPX x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2 Standard TCP/IP
(HP)
TCP/IP
(MS)
IPX/SPX
(HP) x x x x x x x x x
2 x
2 x
2 x
2
1- This column represents the following Microsoft Share configurations:
•
2000, XP, or 2003 host with NT 4.0, 98, or Me client
•
NT 4.0 host with 2000, XP, 2003, 98, or Me client
•
98, or Me host with any client
2- In this environment, client machines use Point and Print to download the configured driver from the host.
3- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
33
Table 5: Enterprise Autoconfiguration availability in Novell Netware environments
Method Connection type
Netware 4.x
Bindery queue
Novell
Netware 5.x
NDS queue Bindery queue
NT 4.0
Installer Direct connect
Network
USB
Parallel
Jetdirect x x x x
Standard
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
TCP/IP (HP)
TCP/IP
(MS
(HP)
1
)
IPX/SPX
1- Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft
Client Service for NetWare.
The following tables provide information about the availability of Printer Status and Alerts in various operating systems and network environments.
Table 6: Printer Status and Alerts availability in Novell Netware environments
Method
Installer Network
Connection type
Jetdirect
Standard
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
TCP/IP
(HP)
TCP/IP
(MS
(HP)
1
)
IPX/SPX x x
Bindery queue
x x
Netware 4.x
Novell
Netware 5.x
NDS queue Bindery NDS queue
x x x x x
queue
x x x x x x x
1- Bidirectional functionality is supported only with the client software from Novell. It is not supported with Microsoft
Client Service for NetWare.
34
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Driver Autoconfiguration
The HP LaserJet 6 drivers for Windows and the PS drivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 feature bidirectional communication technology which, in supported environments, provides automatic discovery and driver configuration for printer accessories at the time of installation. Some accessories the
Driver Autoconfiguration supports are the duplexing unit, optional paper trays, and dual inline memory modules
(DIMMs).
If the environment supports bidirectional communication, the installer presents Driver Autoconfiguration as an installable component by default for a Typical Installation and for a Custom Installation. The Driver Autoconfiguration component installs the bidirectional communication software. If the installation environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Driver Autoconfiguration option does not appear during installation. However, installed drivers are configured automatically in accordance with the HP printer bundle that is selected during installation of the printing-system software, except in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
Note
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
For Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, Driver Autoconfiguration works in the following ways:
•
In environments that support bidirectional communication, the computer communicates with the printer during installation, determines the physical configuration, and then configures the driver accordingly.
The bidirectional communication software that is necessary for the preceding method of Driver Autoconfiguration is included in a Typical Installation and a Custom Installation when installing a network printer in supported environments.
Note
•
Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration functionality for an Add Printer wizard installation over a network. An Add Printer wizard installation that includes EAC is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the device. Configuration occurs without user interaction. If bidirectional communication software has been installed previously, EAC is not activated, and the
Add Printer Wizard uses the pre-existing bidirectional communication software to configure the printer driver. If bidirectional communication software has not been installed, EAC installs the bidirectional communication software. EAC communicates with the printer and automatically matches the printer driver with the actual printer configuration. EAC is activated only once to use the autoconfiguration utility, and is then shut off. The files required to install EAC remain on your system.
When you use the Add Printer wizard to install drivers, you must select the HP LaserJet model that corresponds to your printer. The Add Printer wizard installs the driver using the correct settings for the model without communicating with the printer. If you do not select the model that corresponds to your printer, the driver settings do not match the actual printer.
•
HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise environments can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP printer drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment. For more information, see the HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide, which is available at:
http://www.hp.com/support/clj3700
Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0
For Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0, Driver Autoconfiguration works in the following ways:
•
In environments that support bidirectional communication, the computer communicates with the printer during installation, determines the physical configuration, and then configures the driver accordingly.
•
If the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer changes after installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication. For example, if the HP Color LaserJet 3700dn is installed and an optional paper-handling accessory is added later, you can automatically configure the acessory in the driver by clicking the Update Now button on the driver's
Configure tab. The Update Now button activates the HP Network Registry Agent (HPNRA) and triggers the driver
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
35
Note
to recheck the registry for new information. The HPNRA automatically updates the registry and changes the configuration information that appears on the Configure tab in the Printer folder.
The bidirectional communication software that is necessary Driver Autoconfiguration to function is included in a
Typical Installation and a Custom Installation when installing a network printer in supported environments.
•
In environments that do not support bidirectional communication, the driver automatically configures options based on the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer model that is selected during the installation of the printing-system software. Configuration is based solely on the definition of the printer model. See the following table, Driver
Autoconfiguration Defaults, for more information.
•
Enterprise AutoConfiguration (EAC) uses bidirectional communication to provide autoconfiguration functionality for an Add Printer wizard installation over a network. An Add Printer wizard installation that includes EAC is configured with the same settings as the physical configuration of the device. Configuration occurs without user interaction. If bidirectional communication software has been installed previously, EAC is not activated, and the
Add Printer Wizard uses the pre-existing bidirectional communication software to configure the printer driver. If bidirectional communication software has not been installed, EAC installs the bidirectional communication software. EAC communicates with the printer and automatically matches the printer driver with the actual printer configuration. EAC is activated only once to use the autoconfiguration utility, and is then shut off. The files required to install EAC remain on your system.
•
HP Driver Preconfiguration (also known as DMC) is a software architecture and set of tools that permits HP software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver
Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators in corporate and enterprise environments can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP printer drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment. For more information, see the HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide, which is available at:
http://www.hp.com/support/clj3700
36
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
The following table lists the Driver Autoconfiguration defaults for Windows operating systems.
Table 7: Driver Autoconfiguration defaults for Windows operating systems
Operating System
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000 unidriver
Windows 2000 traditional
Windows XP unidriver
Windows XP traditional
Configuration Method
Model configuration
HP Preconfiguration
Model configuration
HP Preconfiguration
N
Y
1
Enterprise Auto Configuration N
Model configuration
HP Preconfiguration
N
Y
1
Enterprise Auto Configuration N
Enterprise Auto Configuration N
Model configuration
HP Preconfiguration
N
Y
1
Model configuration
HP Preconfiguration
N
Y
1
Enterprise Auto Configuration N
Enterprise Auto Configuration N
Model configuration
HP Preconfiguration
N
Y
1
Model configuration
HP Preconfiguration
N
Y
1
Enterprise Auto Configuration N
N
Y
1
Enterprise Auto Configuration N
Add Printer Wizard
Parallel USB
N
Y
1
N
N
Y
1
N
NA
NA
N
N
Y
1
N
N
N
Y
1
N
N
Y
1
NA
N
Y
1
Y
N
Y
1
Y
N
Y
1
Y
N
Y
1
Y
Y
N
Y
1
Y
N
Y
1
Y
N
Y
1
Network
N
Y
1
Network
Installer
Y
1
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
N
Y
1
Y
Y
1
Y
Y
Y
1
Y
N
Y
1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
1
1- HP Preconfiguration should always work. HP Preconfiguration configures the driver to match the printer the user is installing to if the printer matches the current HP Preconfiguration file (for example, duplexer on, no trays, manual duplex on, memory 48 MB, job storage off, mopy off) or if the administrator has modified the configuration file and the configuration file matches the printer being installed to.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
37
The following table lists the drivers that support EAC in Windows operating systems.
Table 8: Drivers that support Enterprise AutoConfiguration
Product Windows 98, Me Windows NT 4.0
HP LaserJet 2300 Yes
HP Color LaserJet 2500 Yes
HP LaserJet 4100 and
4100mfp
HP LaserJet 4200 and
4300
No
Yes
HP Color LaserJet 4550 No
HP Color LaserJet 4600 Yes
HP LaserJet 5100 No
HP Color LaserJet 5500 Yes
HP Color LaserJet 8150 No
HP LaserJet 9000mfp No
HP Color LaserJet 9500 Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows 2000, XP
Yes
Yes
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
HP Toolbox
The HP Toolbox is a series of Web pages and a supporting Windows-based software program that provide access to the HP Color LaserJet 3700 embedded Web servers and other firmware functions, making them available on a browser-driven user interface where printer properties can be viewed and manipulated. Some pages are accessed through the toolbox interface,
The HP Toolbox provides links to printer status information, help information, and tools for diagnosing and solving problems. The HP Toolbox also provides printer status and settings information from the embedded Web server, by clicking the Advanced Settings button in the upper right corner of each of the four tabs.
HP Toolbox requirements
The HP Toolbox depends on the Proxy Service (also referred to as Web Proxy) and HP bidirectional communication to gain access to direct-connect printer information though embedded Web servers. HP Toolbox requires one of these recent Internet browsers in order to show printer embedded Web server pages:
•
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.72.x or later
•
Netscape 4.0 or later
These browser requirements are not necessarily minimum standards, but they are the minimum tested environments.
Other, untested browsers might also provide access to Toolbox pages.
The HP Toolbox is supported only for Windows 98 and later operating systems (Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, and 32-bit Windows XP). You must have performed a complete software installation in order to use the HP Toolbox.
When the HP Color LaserJet printer is connected both through a network using a Jetdirect card and through a local parallel or USB connection, the network connection takes precedence. On a network connection, bidirectional communication is supported through a TCP/IP or an IPX/SPX connection. When the printer is connected using both a parallel and a USB connection, the parallel connection takes precedence, and the USB connection is disconnected.
38
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
To view the HP Toolbox
To open the HP Color LaserJet 3700 Toolbox, on the Start menu, point to Programs, point to HP Color LaserJet
3700, and then click HP Color LaserJet 3700 Toolbox.
The HP Toolbox opens in your Web browser. The HP Toolbox software contains four tabs.
• the Status tab
• the Troubleshooting tab
• the Alerts tab
• the Documentation tab
These tabs are on local browser pages that are installed when you install the printing system software, and you do not need an Internet service provider to view them.
The toolbox also contains an area with links to the HP Web site. While you do not need to have Internet access to open and use the HP Toolbox, you must have Internet access in order to gain access to the site associated with the link in the Other Links area.
If your computer is connected to the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer through a network, you can bookmark the URL of the HP Toolbox so that you can return to it quickly in the future.
The HP Toolbox Frame
Each page in the HP Toolbox has a frame with a top banner, three category tabs, a left-aligned navigation menu bar, and a main-content area. Selecting one of the category tabs causes the corresponding left-aligned navigation bar to appear. The left-aligned navigation menu includes links to content appropriate for that tab. The main-content area displays information and options in response to navigation tab selections or from selections in the menu bar.
See the following sections for more information about each tab or area:
• Top banner
• Status tab
• Troubleshooting tab
• Alerts
• Documentation tab
• "Other Links" in Other Links
Top Banner
The top banner has an HP logo. Next to the HP logo, the title of the page appears followed by the product name and a copyright notice. The top banner is the same for all Toolbox Web pages. The HP logo contains a link to http://www.hp.
com.
Status tab
The Status tab, with the Device Status setting selected, is shown in the following illustration.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
39
Figure 1: Toolbox Status tab
40
The Status tab provides the following options:
•
Device Status. This page shows the percentage of life remaining for each consumable; the status and configuration information for the input trays and output; and the accessories that are installed on the computer.
• Supplies Status. This page shows the levels remaining for all consumables and the HP Part Numbers for each consumable. (It is helpful to have the part numbers available when it is time to order supplies.)
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
•
Print Info Pages. This page displays the device description, asset number, company name, contact person, and the printer’s TCP/IP address, model, number, and serial number.
•
toolbox Links
•
Other Links
Troubleshooting tab
The Troubleshooting tab and options are shown in the following illustration.
Figure 2: Troubleshooting tab-Print Quality Tools
Note
The navigation bar on the Troubleshooting tab contains links to the information pages of the printer. (Some of these pages are also available from other sources, such as the embedded Web server or the printer itself.) From this section, you can view the following pages:
•
•
Print Quality Tools
•
Maintenance
•
Error Messages
•
Paper Jams
•
Supported Media
•
Printer Pages
Netscape users must download a plug-in so that printer management features can operate correctly. A link and instructions are provided in the Other Links section. After you click a link, a pop-up window appears that provides information and instructions about how to locate this plug-in.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
41
Print Quality Tools
Print Quality tools consist of tools for general troubleshooting, Print Quality Troubleshooting Pages, a Calibrate Now
Function, and a Cleaning Page.
Maintenance
Figure 3: Troubleshooting tab-Maintenance
The Maintenance option consist of tools for Managing Supplies, Changing Print Cartridges , Replacing the Image
Transfer Kit, Replacing the Fuser Kit, and a cleaning the printer.
42
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Error Messages
Figure 4: Troubleshooting tab-Control Panel Messages
The Control Panel Messages section lists messages that might appear in the control panel on the printer or in the toolbox.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
43
Paper Jams
Figure 5: Troubleshooting tab-Paper Jams
The Paper Jam Option section shows the internal paper path and explains paper jam recovery.
44
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Supported Media
Figure 6: Troubleshooting tab-Supported Media
The Supported Media section shows a list of supported paper widths and sizes, explains how to configure trays, and discusses paper handling problems.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
45
Printer Pages
Figure 7: Troubleshooting tab-Printer Pages
The Printer Pages section shows a list of useful information pages generated by the printer.
46
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Alerts tab
The Alerts tab is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 8: Alerts tab
The navigation bar on the Alerts tab contains links to the information pages of the printer. (Some of these pages are also available from other sources, such as the embedded Web server or the printer itself.) From this section, you can view the following pages:
•
Set up Status Alertst
•
Administrative Settings
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
47
Documentation tab
The Documentation tab is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 9: Documentation tab -Install Notes
The navigation bar on the Documentation tab contains links to these information sources:
•
Install Notes. Contains late-breaking information about the printer. In English only.
•
Interactive User Guide. Contains information about printer usage, warranty, specifications, and support. The
HTML format allows you to search easily for specific topics and jump between topics. For use with
Windows-based computers only.
•
User Guide-PDF. Contains information about printer usage, warranty, specifications, and support. This PDF format can be printed by page or by chapter, or you can print the entire document. The printed document is formatted as a traditional book.
48
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Linking to Embedded Web Server
To gain access to the printer’s Embedded Web Server, click the Advanced Printer Settings button in the upper right of any Toolbox page. You can also open a browser window and type in the JetDirect IP address.
The HP Toolbox Device Status option on the Status tab is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 10: Status tab with Advanced Printer Settings button
For additional information and a copy of the HP Embedded Web Server for HP LaserJet Printers guide, go to the following URL: http://www.hp.com/support/clj3700
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
49
50
Other Links
This section contains links that connect you to the Internet. These links are displayed on the left navigational bar throughout the embedded Web server pages. You must have Internet access in order to use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect when you first opened the HP Toolbox, you must connect before you can visit these Web sites. Connecting might require that you close the HP Toolbox and reopen it.
HP Instant Support (TM) This link connects you to a set of dynamic Web resources that you can use to solve specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for your device. Specific status and configuration information about the product is retained and directed to the “Solve a Problem” Web site, which offers targeted support content and messages to help resolve problems as quickly as possible.
Order Supplies. Click this link to connect to an ordering page where you can order genuine HP supplies, such as print cartridges, an imaging drum, and paper.
Product Support. This link connects you with an HP product support page from which you can search for information, contact the HP customer care home page, or find additional resources for your product.
HP Embedded Web Server
The HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) is a standard feature for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer. It is fully documented in the EWS guide. Only selected portions are reproduced here.
HP Web Access (also referred to as the embedded Web server, or EWS) provides a simple, easy-to-use solution for one-to-one printer management. The HP Toolbox connects to HP Web Access through the Proxy Service using a browser interface. The Proxy Service enables bidirectional communication to gain access to the printer's EWS through a direct connection, but it also functions in the same way with network connections. For network connectivity, the
Proxy Service operates only over TCP/IP. The Proxy Service was not implemented to operate over IPX.
In environments that have a larger number of printers, where one-to-one management is impractical, HP Web Access and HP Web JetAdmin work together to provide scalable remote printer management. HP Web JetAdmin is used for consolidated management tasks, where operations are performed on a selected set of printers instead of on individual printers. For such environments, HP has provided hooks between HP Web Access and HP Web JetAdmin so that
Web Access features can be configured on multiple printers in one operation.
In environments with a larger number of printers, where one-to-one management is impractical, the HP Embedded
Web Server and HP Web JetAdmin work together to provide scalable remote printer management. Use HP Web
JetAdmin for consolidated management tasks, when you want to perform operations on a selected set of printers instead of on individual printers. For such environments, HP provides hooks between the HP Embedded Web Server and HP Web JetAdmin so that you can configure HP Embedded Web Server features on multiple printers in one operation. For example, you can set the security password for the HP Embedded Web Server on a population of printers simultaneously.
For additional information and a copy of the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide, go to:
http://www.hp.com/support/clj3700
To view information about the printer by using the HP Embedded Web Server, open a supported Web browser and type in the printer transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) address or host name. To find the TCP/IP address, look for "IP Address" on the enhanced input/output (EIO) Jetdirect page, in the "TCP/IP" section under
"Protocol Information". To find the host name of the printer, look for "Host Name" in the "TCP/IP" section.
You also can view information about an installed HP Jetdirect print server by clicking the Networking tab in the HP
Embedded Web Server window.
To print a copy of the EIO Jetdirect page from the printer control panel display, follow these steps:
1. Press the select button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press the select button.
3. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4. Press the select button to print the configuration page.
5. Look in the configuration page section marked "Printer Information" for the firmware date code. The firmware date code looks something like this: 20030502 05.003.0
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Embedded Web Server Pages
Figure 11: Embedded Web Server tabs
Information tab
The HP Embedded Web Server offers the following features. To view the information, click the items on the menu that is on the left side of the HP Embedded Web Server Information tab:
•
Device Status. This page provides current status information about your printer.
•
Configuration Page. This page provides information about the configuration of your printer.
•
Supplies Status. This page provides information about the print cartridge and the total pages printed, and the serial number of the printer.
•
Event Log. This page provides information about reported printer errors.
•
Usage Page. This page provides information about reported printer errors.
•
Device Information. This page shows device information, such as the printer TCP/IP address and serial number.
•
Control Panel. This page shows the layout of the control panel.
•
Print. This page provides information about reported printer errors.
In addition, a section entitled Other Links provides links to off-printer solutions.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
51
Device status
If a printer problem exists, status information (such as whether the printer is online or the toner is low) is available through your Web browser on a computer that is linked directly to the printer. You can view this information without physically going to the printer to identify the status. The following illustration shows how this information is presented on the printer Web page.
Figure 12: Device Status page
52
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Configuration page
The HP Embedded Web Server configuration page provides configuration information about the printer in the same way as the configuration page printed from the printer. The following illustration shows an example of a configuration page viewed remotely through the HP Embedded Web Server.
Figure 13: Configuration page
Note
The difference between the Total Memory setting and the DIMM Slot 1 memory value is reserved for system use.
Other Links
Links within the home page of the HP Web Server provide an easy way to locate information or complete tasks.
•
hp instant support. This link connects you to a set of dynamic Web resources that help you solve specific problems and determine additional services that might be available for your device. Specific status and configuration information about the printer is retained and directed to the "Solve a Problem" Web site. This site offers targeted support content and messages to help resolve problems as quickly as possible.
•
Order Supplies. This link connects to an ordering page where you can order genuine HP supplies, such as print cartridges and paper.
•
Product Support. This link connects to an HP product support page from which you can search for information, contact the HP customer care home page, or find additional resources for your printer.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
53
Settings tab
The options on the left side of the Settings tab are as follows. If your HP Color LaserJet 3700 is installed on a network, the appearance of the Settings tab is modified by the presence of three additional options in the menu on the left:
•
Alerts. From this page, the system administrator can set up the printer to send problem and status alerts to anyone through e-mail. More than one individual can receive alerts, with each person receiving only specific alerts. For example, an administrative assistant might be responsible for keeping toner loaded in a printer or fixing paper jams, while major consumables are handled by an external service provider. Alerts can be set up so the administrative assistant gets advanced warning on toner low situations, and the external service provider gets alerts on fusers, print drums, and transfer belts.
•
Email. The Email page lets you configure e-mail settings for outgoing and incoming mail. This enables you to use the printer's “send and receive” capabilities.
•
Time Services. This page shows the current device time and time server status. There are fields to let you set the address of the network time server, the interval (in hours) at which the time is to be synchronized with the server, and the local port that receives the time from the server.
•
Configure Device
•
Email Server
•
Alerts
•
AutoSend
•
Security
•
Edit Other Links
•
Device Information
•
Language
•
Time Services
54
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Configure device
You can obtain printer configuration information through a Web browser by opening the printer HP Embedded Web
Server page and changing any of the basic configuration information on the Settings tab. Security and password controls give management information system managers the level of control that they require within their environments. The following illustration shows an example of printer options that can be configured remotely.
Some configuration tasks cannot be performed remotely because you must examine printed pages.
Figure 14: Configure Device
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
55
Networking tab
If your HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer is installed on a network, the Networking tab is available in the HP Toolbox (it does not appear when the printer is installed only through a parallel or USB connection). The Networking pages allow you to view network status and configure the printer's network card from your computer. The Networking pages are not part of the embedded Web server in your printer; they reside on an embedded Web server that is included with your HP JetDirect EIO network card. The appearance and features of the Networking pages might differ, depending on the version of your HP JetDirect card.
The following illustration shows the Network Settings option on the HP Embedded Web Server Networking tab.
Figure 15: Networking tab
56
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Networking tab categories
Figure 16: Networking tab
The menu on the left of the screen contains networking options under three categories:
•
Configuration
•
Security
•
Diagnostics
Configuration
•
Network Settings
•
Other Settings
•
Select Language
Security
•
Settings
•
Authorization
•
MManagement Protocols
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
57
Diagnostics
Network Statistics
Protocol Info
Configuration Page
To the right of the menu, various network settings are available.
•
TCP/IP
•
IPX/SPX
•
AppleTalk
•
Data Link Control/Logical Link Control (DLC/LLC)
•
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
Below are some of the tasks you may be able to perform from the Networking pages:
•
Change network configuration settings for various types of network connections.
•
Enable or disable printing protocols.
•
Set up a support contact and support URLs.
•
Set up a password to control who can remotely access the Networking pages.
•
View general network status information, including network statistics stored on the print server.
•
View protocol information for all supported network connections.
•
Display the HP JetDirect Configuration Page.
•
Set the frequency at which the embedded Web server will check the network status.
58
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Configuration Information
The HP LaserJet printer configuration page provides configuration information about the product in the same way as the configuration page printed from the printer. The following illustration shows an example of a configuration page viewed remotely through the HP Toolbox.
Figure 17: Configuration page
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
59
Settings tab
The Settings tab, with the Configure Device setting selected, is shown in the following figure.
Figure 18: Settings tab - Configure device
The following links are available on the Settings tab:
•
Configure Device. This page provides the capability to remotely print internal printer pages and configure the printer. From the internal printer pages, you can configure the paper trays and change other printer settings.
•
Email Server.
•
Alerts.
•
AutoSend.
•
Security. From the Security page, you can set a password to control who can cancel jobs remotely or access the
Device pages. The user name is already set as “laserjet”. Once the password has been set, you will be prompted to enter a password when you access the Device Status, the Device Information, or the Order Supplies link.
•
Edit Other Links. These are the same links that are shown on the left navigational bar throughout the embedded
Web server pages.
•
Device Information. This page displays the device description, asset number, company name, contact person, and the printer’s TCP/IP address, model, number, and serial number.
•
Language. This page lets you select which language is used to display the embedded Web server pages. The default language is the language currently in use by the Web browser.
•
Time Services This page lets you select which language is used to display the embedded Web server pages.
The default language is the language currently in use by the Web browser.
•
Print Services.
60
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Configurable e-mail alerts
The printer can automatically send e-mail alerts about printer problems or job status to specified e-mail addresses. For example, if toner is low, the printer can notify the person responsible for ordering or changing the cartridge. If a printer fails, an e-mail alert can be sent directly to the person responsible for fixing the problem. These e-mail alerts can be configured to be sent to any device that can accept e-mail, such as digital phones, pagers, and personal digital assistants. In large environments, administrators can route e-mail addresses to list-servers or URLs for expanded notification.
Figure 19: Configurable alerts
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
61
Email setting
Use this tab to set incoming and outgoing mail values for alerts. If your HP LaserJet 3700 product is installed on a supported network, it can send e-mail messages directly. However, you must configure e-mail information to initiate this capability. One use for this feature is to send diagnostic information to solve a printer problem. An e-mail sent to the printer requests configuration information. The printer automatically sends that information back to the service provider. In many cases, the problem can be identified quickly and solved remotely. For more information about e-mail command and response, see the HP Embedded Web Server for HP LaserJet Printers guide.
To configure your product to send e-mails, follow these steps:
1. Take note of your product’s TCP/IP address on the EIO X JetDirect page. (It is the second page of the
Configuration Page printout.) To print a configuration page, see “Determining the current level of firmware”.)
2. On the HP Toolbox Device tab, click Settings. The HP Web Access home page appears.
3. Click the Settings tab, and then click Alerts on the navigational bar on the left.
4. In Notification Distribution Lists, type your e-mail address (for example, "[email protected]".)
5. In Select Events, click Media Path.
6. Click Apply. A screen stating that your selections have been accepted should appear. Click OK.
7. Click Apply. A screen stating that your selections have been accepted should appear. Click OK.
8. On the Settings tab, click Email on the navigational bar on the left.
9. In the SMTP Server: field under Outgoing Mail, type the TCP/IP address (for example, 192.168.0.201).
10. In the Domain Name: field under Outgoing Mail, type the domain name.
11. Click Apply.
12. Click Security.
13. In Security, select Outgoing Mail.
14. Click Apply.
15. To test the configuration, open the top cover of the product, and then go to your computer to verify that you have received an e-mail message from the product.
62
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
E-mail command and response
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer can send e-mail messages directly. However, you must configure the email information to initiate this feature. One use for this feature is to send diagnostic information to solve a printer problem. An e-mail sent to the printer requests configuration information. The printer automatically sends that information back to the service provider. In many cases, the service provider can quickly identify the problem and solve the problem remotely. For more information about e-mail command and response, see the HP Embedded Web
Server for HP LaserJet Printers guide.
To configure your printer to send e-mails, follow these steps:
1. Take note of your printer's TCP/IP address on the EIO X Jetdirect page (this is the second page of the
Configuration Page printout. The number indicated by "X" can vary. To print a configuration page, see
"Determining the current level of firmware".
2. Launch your Web browser.
3. In the Address: or Go to: field, type the TCP/IP address that is assigned to the printer (for example,
192.168.0.20) or the host name (for example, http://myprinter). The HP Embedded Web Server home page appears.
4. From the top of the HP Embedded Web Server screen, click Device.
5. On the navigational bar on the left, click Alerts.
6. Under Notification Recipients, type your e-mail address (for example, [email protected]).
7. Click Apply.
8. Under Select Events, click Media Path.
9. Select the List1 check box next to CLOSE DRAWERS/DOORS/COVERS.
10. Click Apply. A screen stating that your selections have been accepted should appear. Click OK.
11. In the SMTP Server: field under Outgoing Mail, type the TCP/IP address for the SMTP server (for example,
192.168.0.201).
12. In the Domain Name: field under Outgoing Mail, type the domain name.
13. Click Apply.
14. Click Security.
15. Under Security, select the Outgoing Mail check box.
16. Click Apply.
17. To test the configuration, open the top cover of the printer, and then go to your computer and verify that you have received an e-mail message from the printer.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
63
Device Status and Alerts
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software includes a utility called Device Status and Alerts that you can use to monitor print jobs and printer status from the desktop. The Device Status and Alerts feature provides printer and job status information such as printing history, job progress, toner and paper levels, and consumables and supplies reordering information, and presents a simulated view of the printer control panel. This utility offers several options for configuring pop-up windows to view the status of the printer and of individual print jobs.
Device Status and Alerts is a selectable component of Custom Installation. To install Device Status and Alerts, select
Custom Installation, and then select the Device Status and Alerts check box.
Device Status and Alerts features are available for printers that have a connection that supports bidirectional functionality, whether directly or over a network. The Device Status and Alerts feature cannot be installed over infrared
(IR) or serial ports. See "Bidirectional communication."
HP Device Status and Alerts communicates with the printer only during an active print job, which minimizes network traffic.
The following restrictions apply to HP products that use
Device Status and Alerts:
When using Device Status and Alerts with Microsoft printer sharing, the following items apply:
When the Device Status and Alerts feature is installed, a status icon in the form of a printer is included in the
Windows system tray in the lower-right corner of the screen, in the . The printer icon remains unchanged until you send a print job to the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer. When you send a print job, the icon changes to alert you to the status of the print job. Neither the Receiving nor the Waiting icon ever shows up in the Systray. When the print job is in a receiving or waiting state, the Printing icon appears in the Systray.
Double-click the status icon to start Device Status and Alerts. The Device Status and Alerts Tab with the Set up
Status Alerts option selected is shown in the following illustration.
64
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 20: Device Status and Alerts, Alerts tab, Set up Status Alerts option
The Alerts tab contains links to the following options:
•
Set up Status Alerts
•
Set up Email Alerts
•
Administrative Settings
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
65
Set up Status and Alerts
The Set up Status and Alerts option allows automatic notification of printer status to an email address, a mobile device or a web address. This option lets you activate the alarm feature and set conditions for its use.
Figure 21: Device Status and Alerts, Alerts tab, Set up Status Alerts option
Refer to the previous section for an illustration of the Set up Status and Alerts option.
66
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Set up Email Alerts
The Set up Email Alerts option allows you to specify the destination of the alert (an email address, a mobile device, or a URL).
Figure 22: Device Status and Alerts, Alerts tab, Set up Status Alerts option
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
67
Administrative Settings
The Administrative settings option allows you to specify the notification rate of the alert.
Figure 23: Device Status and Alerts, Alerts tab, Administrative Settings option
68
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Remote firmware update
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer features a remote firmware update (RFU) capability. The method for downloading remote firmware updates from the Web site is similar to that used to download the latest printing-system software and printer drivers.
The process for remotely upgrading printer firmware involves three steps:
1. Determine the current level of firmware installed on the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer.
2. Go to the Web site and download the latest firmware to your computer.
3. Download the new firmware to the printer.
Determining the current level of firmware
1. On the printer control panel, press the select button (the one with the check mark) to open the menus.
2. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press the select button.
3. Press the up and down buttons to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION.
4. Press the select button to print the configuration page.
5. Look in the configuration page section marked Printer Information for the firmware date code. The firmware date code looks something like this: 20030502 05.003.0
Downloading the new firmware from the HP Web site
For support information about downloading new firmware from the Web, go to:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj3700_firmware
Note
Downloading the new firmware to the printer
The printer can receive an .RFU update to a printer as long as it is in a "ready" state. The printer waits for all of the input/output (I/O) channels to become idle before performing the update.
The firmware update involves a change in the format of nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM). Any menu settings that are changed from the default settings may return to default settings and must be changed again if you want settings that are different from the defaults. Examples of settings that are affected in this way are tray types, default symbol sets, and Web access alerts.
Note
The elapsed time for an update depends on the I/O transfer time, as well as the time that it takes for the printer to reinitialize. The I/O transfer time depends on a number of things, including the speed of the host computer that is sending the update and the I/O method (USB, parallel, or network). The reinitialization time depends on the specific hardware configuration of the printer, such as the number of EIO devices installed, the presence of external paperhandling devices, and the amount of memory installed.
If the remote firmware update process is interrupted before the firmware is downloaded (while RECEIVING UPGRADE appears on the control panel display), the firmware file must be sent again. If power is lost during the flash DIMM update (while UPGRADING PRINTER appears on the control panel display), the update is interrupted and the message RESEND UPGRADE appears (in English only) on the control panel display. The update must now be sent only by a computer that is attached to the parallel port of the printer.
Finally, any print jobs ahead of the .RFU job in the queue are printed before the update is processed.
The printer automatically turns off and then on again after processing the update.
Use one of the following methods to update your printer.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
69
Note
Remote firmware update through a local Windows port
If the printer is connected through a local port (USB or parallel), then you can send the .RFU file directly to the printer by using a COPY command from a command prompt or an MS-DOS (R) window. At the command prompt, perform the following steps for your operating system.
Windows 98 or Windows Me
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type:
Mode lpt1:,,p
If the printer is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the proper LPT port number in the
mode command.
Note
2. Press Enter on the keyboard.The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3. At a command prompt, type:
4.
copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>
where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example:
C:\>copy/b c:\3700fw.rfu lpt1
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
C:\>copy/b "c:\My Documents\3700fw.rfu" lpt1
Note
5. Press Enter on the keyboard. The printer control panel displays the messages described in the section "Printer messages during firmware update". At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel displays the READY message .
6. Print a configuration page and verify that the firmware revision number matches the revision of the current upgrade.
7. Type
exit
at the command prompt to close the command window.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The .RFU file can be sent directly to the printer by typing a copy command at a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window.
1. At a command prompt, type:
copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>
where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example:
C:\>copy/b c:\3700fw.rfu lpt1
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
C:\>copy/b "c:\My Documents\3700fw.rfu" lpt1
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The printer control panel displays the messages described in the section "Printer messages during firmware update". At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel displays the READY message .
70
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
3. At the command prompt, type:
exit
to close the command window.
Note
Remote firmware update through a Windows network
If the printer is shared on a Windows network, follow these instructions.
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type:
copy /B <FILENAME> \\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>
where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the printer is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the printer share name. For example:
C:\>copy /B c:\3700fw.rfu \\your_server\your_computer
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
C:\>copy/b "c:\My Documents\3700fw.rfu" \\your_server\your_computer
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The printer control panel displays the messages described in the section "Printer messages during firmware update". At the end of the upgrade process, the control panel displays the READY message . The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen.
Remote firmware update for UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .RFU file to the printer is acceptable, including the following:
1. At the command prompt, type:
$cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME/dev/parallel>
where </home/yourmachine/FILENAME> contains the .RFU file.
Remote firmware update using FTP on a direct network connection
If the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to update your HP LaserJet firmware. Complete the following steps for your operating system.
Note
Windows operating systems
1. Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The HP Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see "Determining the current level of firmware".
Before connecting to the printer, make sure that the printer is not in PowerSave mode. Also make sure that any error messages are cleared from the control panel display.
2. Open a command window on your computer.
3. Type:
ftp <TCP/IP PRINTER ADDRESS>
For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type:
ftp 192.168.0.90
4. Press Enter on the keyboard.
5. When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
6. When prompted for the password, press Enter.
7. Type:
bin
at the command prompt.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
71
Note
Note
8. Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window.
9. Type:
put <FILENAME>
where <FILENAME> is the name of the .RFU file that was downloaded from the Web, including the path. For example, type:
put C:\LJ\3700FW.RFU
and then press Enter.
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
put "c:\My Documents\LJ\3700fw.rfu"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
226 Transfer complete
Then, a message containing transfer speed information appears.
10. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the printer. This can take about five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the printer or computer.
The printer automatically turns off and then on again after processing the upgrade.
11. At the command prompt, type:
bye
to exit the ftp command.
12. At the command prompt, type:
exit
to return to the Windows (R) interface.
Mac operating systems
1. Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see the "Determining the current level of firmware" section of this guide.
2. Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal application on the computer hard drive under the Applications/Utilities folder.
3. Type:
FTP <TCP/IP PRINTER ADDRESS>
For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type:
FTP 192.168.0.90.
4. Press Enter on the keyboard.
5. When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter.
6. Type:
put <path>
where <path> is the location where the .RFU file was downloaded from the Web, including the path. For example, type:
72
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Note
Note put C:\LJ\3700FW.RFU
and then press Enter.
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
put "c:\My Documents\LJFW.RFU"
To ensure that the entire proper path to the .RFU file is placed in the put command, type
put and a space and then click and drag the .RFU file on to the terminal window. The complete path to the file will be placed after the put command automatically.
7. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the printer. This can take about five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the printer or computer.
The printer automatically turns off and then turns on again to activate the update.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
73
Note
Remote firmware update using FTP through a browser
Follow the instructions below to use FTP through a browser to update the printer firmware remotely.
The following instructions can be used on Windows or Mac operating systems.
1. Open a browser window.
2. In the address line of the browser, type:
ftp://<IPADDRESS>
where <IPADDRESS> is the TCP/IP address of your printer. For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type:
FTP 192.168.0.90
3. Locate the .RFU file for the printer.
4. Drag and drop the .RFU file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.
Remote firmware update using Fetch (Mac OS 9. x only)
For Mac OS 9.x OSs, a shareware program called Fetch provides FTP control for a put command. Download and install the program from:
http://download.cnet.com/downloads/0-10207-100-5250613.html
Follow these instructions to use Fetch.
1. Start the program by clicking on the Fetch icon.
2. Type the IP address of the printer in the Host: box
3. Click the Put Files button and browse to the location of the .RFU file.
4. Double-click the file to select it and download it to the printer. A confirmation message appears in the main window.
5. Click OK.
Remote firmware update using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9. x only)
Follow these instructions to update the firmware using the HP LaserJet Utility.
1. The first step is to make sure you have the tools and files necessary for the update. You will need the
HP LaserJet Utility and the 3700fw.rfu file, which is the firmware file for the printer.
The HP LaserJet Utility can be found on the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software CD-ROM that came with the printer. If you do not have the software CD-ROM, you can obtain the HP LaserJet Utility by downloading the latest printer installer from:
http://www.hp.com
The firmware file ( 3700fw.rfu) can be downloaded from:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj3700_firmware
See the "Downloading the new firmware to the printer" section of this guide for more information.
Once you have the firmware file and the HP LaserJet Utility, you are ready to begin the upgrade process.
2. Launch the HP LaserJet Utility.
3. Click Select Printer and locate the printer you would like to upgrade on the network.
4. Select the printer on the right side of the dialog box, and click OK. An information dialog box for the
HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer appears.
5. On the left side of the information dialog box, click Files. A dialog box appears that allows you to choose a file to be downloaded to the printer.
6. Click Select File.
7. Locate the 3700fw.rfu file on your hard disk, and click the file name to highlight it. Then click Select. The Files dialog box updates showing the
3700fw.rfu file under File to download.
8. Click Download.
74
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
The HP LaserJet Utility starts downloading the file to the printer. A progress bar keeps you updated on how much of the file has been downloaded. While the file is downloading, the RECEIVING UPGRADE message appears on the control-panel display on the printer. After the file has downloaded to the printer the PERFORMING UPGRADE message appears on the control-panel display.
The printer automatically turns off and then turns back on again after processing the upgrade.
Note
9. After the printer has turned on again and finished initializing, print a configuration page to verify that the new firmware has been installed. Press 2, 2, on the printer control panel to print a configuration page. See the
"Determining the current level of firmware" section of this guide for more information.
Remote firmware update using the LPR command
Note
This remote firmware update method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows
Server 2003.
Note
Follow the instructions below to update the printer software remotely using the LPR command.
1. From a command window, type:
lpr -P <IPADDRESS> -S <IPADDRESS> -o l <FILENAME>
-OR-
lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>
-OR-
lpr -S <hostname or IPADDRESS> -Praw <FILENAME>
where <IPADDRESS> can be either the TCP/IP address or the hostname of the printer, and where <FILENAME> is the filename of the .RFU file.
The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The printer control panel displays the messages described in the section "Printer messages during firmware update". At the end of the upgrade process, the printer control panel displays the
READY message.
3. Type:
exit
at the command prompt to close the command window.
Using HP Web JetAdmin to download the firmware to the printer
This procedure requires that you install HP Web JetAdmin version 7.0 or later on your computer. Complete the following steps to update a single printer through HP Web JetAdmin after downloading the .RFU file from the HP Web site.
1. Start HP Web JetAdmin.
2. Type the TCP/IP address or IP host name of the printer in the Quick Device Find field, and then click Go. The printer Status window appears.
3. Open the Device Management folder in the drop-down list in the Navigation panel. Navigate to the Device Lists folder.
4. Expand the Device Lists folder and select All Devices. Locate the printer you wish to update in the list of printers and click to select it.
5. Locate the drop-down box for Device Tools in the upper right corner of the window. Select Update Printer
Firmware from the choose action list.
6. If the name of the .RFU file is not listed in the All Available Images box, click Browse in the Upload New
Firmware Image dialog box and navigate to the location of the .RFU file you downloaded from the web at the start of this procedure. If the filename is listed, select it.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
75
7. Click Upload to move the .RFU file from your hard drive to the HP Web JetAdmin server.
8. Refresh the browser.
9. Select the .RFU file from the Printer Firmware Update drop-down menu.
10. Click Update Firmware. HP Web JetAdmin sends the selected .RFU file to the printer. The printer control panel displays the messages described in the section "Printer messages during firmware update". At the end of the upgrade process, the printer control panel displays the READY message.
Also, HP Web JetAdmin 6.5 can be used to perform multiple or unattended installations.
1. Start HP Web JetAdmin.
2. Create a device group. A simple way to do this is to follow these steps: a. Click Device Management, then click All Devices.
b. Shift-click to select printers that you want to be included in the group, and then click OK.
c. When prompted, type a name for the new device group, and then click
OK.
3. To modify several printers in a group, click the group name, and then click Open.
4. The drop-down menu for Device Group Tools appears in the right side of the window. Scroll if necessary to view it.
5. In the Device Group Tools drop-down box, choose an action. Type in the appropriate information, and click
Return to Device Group when finished.
Printer messages during firmware update
The printer shows three messages that appear during a normal update process.
Table 9: Update messages
Printer message
RECEIVING UPGRADE
UPGRADING PRINTER
WAIT FOR PRINTER TO
REINITIALIZE
Explanation
This message appears from the time the printer recognizes the beginning of an
.RFU update until the time the printer has verified the validity and integrity of the
.RFU update.
This message appears while the printer is actually reprogramming the firmware.
This message appears from the time the printer has finished reprogramming the
DIMM until the printer reinitializes.
Note
To verify that the firmware update succeeded, print a new configuration page from the printer control panel and verify that the firmware date code on the configuration page has changed.
76
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Troubleshooting a firmware update
The following table lists the causes and results of possible interruptions to the firmware update.
Table 10: Troubleshooting a firmware update
Cause
The job was cancelled from the printer control panel.
No update has occurred.
Result
A break in the I/O stream occurred during send (for example, the parallel cable was removed).
A power cycle occurred during RECEIVING
UPGRADE.
No update has occurred.
No update has occurred.
A power cycle occurred during UPGRADING
PRINTER.
A power cycle occurred during WAIT FOR PRINTER
TO REINITIALIZE.
No update has occurred. Resend the update through a parallel port.
The update has been completed.
Print jobs sent to the printer while an update is in process do not interrupt the update.
The following table lists possible reasons for the failure of a remote firmware update and the corrective action required for each situation.
Table 11: Troubleshooting a firmware update failure
Reason for firmware update failure
The .RFU file is corrupted.
The wrong printer model is contained in the .RFU file.
Corrective action
The printer recognizes that the file is corrupted and rejects the update.
Download the file again and send the new file to the printer. Download the file from:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj3700_firmware
The printer recognizes the model mismatch and rejects the update.
Download the correct file and send it to the printer. Download the file from:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj3700_firmware
The upgrade was interrupted.
See the "Troubleshooting a firmware update" table.
A flash hardware failure occurred.
Although it is extremely unlikely, the device might have a hardware failure. Call technical support to address the problem (see the flyer that came with the printer for a local telephone support list).
Note
All HP LaserJet printers leave the factory with the latest available firmware version installed. If a remote firmware update fails, the .RFU file must be sent over a parallel port connection.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
77
Printing .PDF documents from a command line
Documents in Portable Document Format (PDF) can be printed by using a command line instead of the Adobe
Acrobat or Acrobat Reader programs.
Use one of the following methods to print PDF files to your printer.
Command-line printing using a local Windows port
Note
Windows 98 or Windows Me
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type:
Mode lpt1:,,p
If the printer is attached to a parallel port other than LPT1, then substitute the proper LPT port number in the
mode command.
Note
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The response you receive should be similar to these examples:
> LPT1 Not Rerouted
> Resident portion of MODE loaded
> Infinite retry on parallel printer time-out
3. At a command prompt, type:
4.
copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>
where <FILENAME> is the name of the .PDF file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type:
C:\>copy/b c:\3700fw.pdf lpt1
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
C:\>copy/b "c:\My Documents\3700fw.pdf"
5. Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSSING JOB appears on the printer front panel, and the job prints.
6. At the command prompt, type:
exit
to close the command window.
78
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
The .PDF file can be sent directly to the printer by typing a copy command at a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window.
1. At a command prompt, type:
copy /b <FILENAME> <PORTNAME>
where <FILENAME> is the name of the .PDF file (including the path) and <PORTNAME> is the name of the appropriate printer port (such as LPT1). For example, type:
C:\>copy/b c:\3700fw.pdf lpt1
2. Press Enter on the keyboard.
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
C:\>copy/b "c:\My Documents\3700fw.pdf"
The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the printer control panel, and the job prints.
3. At the command prompt, type:
exit
to close the command window.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
79
Note
Command-line printing using a Windows network
If the printer is shared on a Windows network, follow these instructions.
1. From a command prompt or in an MS-DOS window, type the following:
copy /B <FILENAME> \\<COMPUTERNAME>\<SHARENAME>
where <FILENAME> is the name of the .PDF file (including the path), <COMPUTERNAME> is the name of the computer from which the printer is being shared, and <SHARENAME> is the printer share name. For example:
C:\>copy /B c:\3700fw.pdf \\your_server\your_computer
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
C:\>copy/b /B "c:\My Documents\3700fw.pdf" \\your_server\your_computer.
2. Press Enter on the keyboard. The message PROCESSING JOB appears on the printer front panel, and the job prints. The message 1 file(s) copied appears on the computer screen.
Command-line printing using UNIX systems
For UNIX systems, any command method that delivers the .PDF file to the printer is acceptable, including the following:
1. At the command prompt, type:
$cp </home/yourmachine/FILENAME/dev/parallel>
where </home/yourmachine/FILENAME> contains the .PDF file.
Command-line printing using FTP on a direct network connection
If the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer uses a direct network connection, use file transfer protocol (FTP) to print a
PDF document. Complete the following steps for the operating system.
Windows operating systems
1. Open a command window on your computer.
2. Type:
ftp <TCP/IP PRINTER ADDRESS>
For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type:
ftp 192.168.0.90
3. Press Enter on the keyboard.
4. When prompted for the user name, press Enter.
5. When prompted for the password, press Enter.
6. Type:
bin
at the command prompt.
7. Press Enter. The message 200 Types set to I, Using binary mode to transfer files appears in the command window.
8. Type:
put <FILENAME>
where <FILENAME> is the name of the .PDF file to be printed, including the path. For example, type:
put C:\LJ\3700FW.PDF
and then press Enter.
80
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
put "c:\My Documents\LJ\3700fw.pdf"
The following series of messages appears in the command window:
200 PORT command successful
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Ready
226 Processing Job
9. Your .PDF print job prints.
Note
Mac operating systems
1. Take note of the TCP/IP address on the EIO Jetdirect page. The Jetdirect page is the second page of the configuration page printout. To print a configuration page, see the "Determining the current level of firmware" section of this guide.
2. Open a Terminal window on your Macintosh. You can find the Terminal application on the computer hard drive under the Applications/Utilities folder.
3. Type:
FTP <TCP/IP PRINTER ADDRESS>
For example, if the TCP/IP address is 192.168.0.90, type:
FTP 192.168.0.90.
4. Press Enter on the keyboard.
5. When prompted for a user name and password, press Enter.
6. Type:
put <path>
where <path> is the location where the .PDF file was downloaded from the Web. For example, type:
put C:\LJ\3700FW.PDF
and then press Enter.
If the file name or path includes a space, you must enclose the file name or path in quotation marks. For example, type:
put "c:\My Documents\LJ\3700fw.pdf"
Note
To ensure that the entire proper path to the .PDF file is placed in the put command, type
put and a space and then click and drag the .PDF file on to the terminal window. The complete path to the file will be placed after the put command automatically.
7. The download process begins and the firmware is updated on the printer. This can take about five minutes. Let the process finish without further interaction with the printer or computer.
8. The printer automatically turns off and on again to activate the update.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Technology background information
81
Note
Command-line printing using FTP through a browser
Follow the instructions below to use FTP through a browser to print from a command line.
The following instructions can be used on Windows or Mac operating systems.
1. Open a browser window.
2. In the address line of the browser, type:
ftp://<IPADDRESS>
For example, if the TCP/IP address of your printer is 192.168.0.90, type:
FTP 192.168.0.90
3. Locate the .PDF file for the printer.
4. Drag and drop the .PDF file onto the PORT1 icon in the browser window.
Command-line printing using Fetch (OS 9. x only)
For Mac 9.x OSs, a shareware program called Fetch provides FTP control for a Put command. Download and install the program from:
http://download.cnet.com/downloads/0-10207-100-5250613.html
Follow these instructions to use Fetch.
1. Start the program by clicking on the Fetch icon.
2. Enter the IP address of the printer in the Host: box
3. Click the Put Files button and browse to the location of the .PDF file.
4. Double-click the file to select it and download it to the printer. A confirmation message appears in the main window.
5. Click OK.
Command-line printing using the HP LaserJet Utility (Mac OS 9. x only)
Follow these instructions to print a .PDF file using the HP LaserJet Utility.
1. The first step is to make sure you have the tools and files necessary for the update. You will need the
HP LaserJet Utility and the .PDF file that you want to print.
The HP LaserJet Utility can be found on the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software CD-ROM that came with the printer. If you do not have the software CD-ROM, you can obtain the HP LaserJet Utility by downloading the latest printer installer from:
http://www.hp.com
Once you have the HP LaserJet Utility and you know the location of the .PDF file you want to print, you are ready to begin the command-line printing process.
2. Launch the HP LaserJet Utility.
3. Click Select Printer and locate the printer you would like to upgrade on the network.
4. Select the printer on the right side of the dialog box, and click OK. An information dialog box for the
HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer appears.
5. On the left side of the information dialog box, click Files. A dialog box appears that allows you to choose a file to be downloaded to the printer.
6. Click Select File.
7. On your hard disk, locate the .PDF file that you want to print, and click the file name to highlight it. Then click
Select. The Files dialog box updates showing the .PDF file that you want to print under File to download.
8. Click Download.
The HP LaserJet Utility starts downloading the file to the printer. A progress bar keeps you updated on how much of the file has been downloaded. While the file is downloading, the PROCESSING JOB message appears on the control-panel display on the printer, and the the .PDF file prints.
82
Technology background information Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Command-line printing using the LPR command
This command-line printing method is for use in Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows
Server 2003.
Note
Follow the instructions below to print a .PDF file remotely using the LPR command.
1. From a command window, type:
lpr -P IPADDRESS -S IPADDRESS -o l FILENAME
where IPADDRESS can be either the TCP/IP address or the host name of the printer, and where FILENAME is the file name of the .PDF file. You may also use the raw method described previously. The alternate commands ar repeted here for convenience.
From a command window, type:
lpr -P <IPADDRESS> -S <IPADDRESS> -o l <FILENAME>
-OR-
lpr -S <IPADDRESS> -Pbinps <FILENAME>
-OR-
lpr -S <hostname or IPADDRESS> -Praw <FILENAME>
The parameter (-o l) consists of a lowercase "O", not a zero, and a lowercase "L", not the numeral 1. This parameter sets the transport protocol to binary mode.
2. The file prints, but no further messages appear in the command prompt window.
3. Type:
exit
at the command prompt to close the command window.
Euro character
The euro is the name for the currency of the European Union (EU). This unit was launched on January 1, 1999. The euro has changed the way business is conducted in Europe and has affected every company and industry in the world. It is vital that companies understand and prepare for the changes the euro brings.
This HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer includes euro characters for each of the internal fonts. The printer can print the euro character in the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows
Server 2003 operating systems. HP is committed to maximizing document portability through supporting and promoting euro-symbol standards.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Euro character
83
Printing-system components
Printing system and installer
HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM for Windows systems
In previous versions of the printing-system software, the installer was started by locating and running the SETUP.EXE
file. For the Microsoft Windows environment (Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows
XP, and Windows Server 2003), the HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM provides an interactive software window that you can use not only to install the printer drivers and related components, but also to gain access to online product registration, user documentation, a customization utility, Adobe Acrobat Reader software, and optional
HP software.
The following illustration shows the main screen of the HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM, which appears when you insert the printing software CD-ROM in your CD-ROM drive. If the screen does not appear when you insert the CD-ROM, click Start, click Run, click Browse..., navigate to the root directory of the CD-ROM, and then doubleclick the SETUP.EXE file to start the CD-ROM.
Figure 24: Installation software CD-ROM main screen
84
Printing-system components Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM contains the following options. The text that follows each of the following options is approximately the same text that appears when you put the cursor on the option button.
The options on your printer might vary from the illustration.
Note
install printer - This wizard guides you through the installation of your HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software. You are given the choice of performing a Typical Installation or a Custom Installation. If you select Typical
Installation, only the necessary software is installed. If you select Custom Installation, you can select the components you want to install.
customization utility - This utility can be used to create a custom software installer for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer that can then be copied to other media, such as a local hard drive or a network drive.
register product - This option can be used to register your HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer now and to receive the following information at no cost:
• notification of driver updates
• technical support updates
• news about emerging technologies
printer documentation - This option can be used to view the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer documentation.
The following document options are available:
•
view user guide
•
print user guide
•
install notes
•
web server users guide
•
hp jetdirect guide
For systems that do not have Adobe Acrobat Reader 4.0 or later installed, you are given the option to install that software. Clicking any of the links to documentation that is provided in the Adobe Acrobat PDF file format opens a dialog box from which you can install Adobe Acrobat Reader software from the HP Color LaserJet 3700 software
CD-ROM.
support - To increase productivity and get the most use from your HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer, view a list of optional software available for installation and links to HP Web sites. The following options are available:
•
Click HP web jetadmin to download HP Web JetAdmin software from the Web for a Web browser-based networkprinter-management tool.
•
Click color matching information for information about how to make best use of the color functions of your
HP Color LaserJet 3700.
•
Click supplies for information about ordering HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printing supplies.
•
Click product information for HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer support information and updates.
•
Click hp.com to go to the HP home Web page for products and services, support, drivers, and HP online stores.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Printing-system components
85
Installer features
The common installer is designed to provide a simple and consistent installation method for the product line. The common installer is available for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
The common installer offers the following features:
• The HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM features an interactive software interface. See the "HP Color
LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM for Windows systems" section of this guide.
• Acrobat Reader is available.
• The installer is Web-enabled, providing access to the HP Web site for the latest software components and drivers.
• Network connection is integrated so that you can install drivers and connect to a network printer in a single process.
•
The selection dialog box sets the operating-system language as the default language (for Windows 98, Windows
Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 only). You can use the installer to select any of the languages on the HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM.
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM also includes the following features:
• the HP LaserJet Uninstaller Utility
• product registration, using the Web and e-mail
• the HP Customization Utility for custom installations
All of the Windows system components are installed by using the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system installer.
The installer automatically senses your language of choice and your operating system. It offers selections for each printer model. You can select the type of installation you prefer: Typical Installation or Custom Installation.
When performing a Web installation, the installer compares the versions of the software components on the
HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM to those on the HP Web site. If newer versions are on the HP Web site, the installer downloads them.
86
Printing-system components Software Technical Reference ENWW
Installable components
This section provides information about the various installable components that are available either with the
HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM or from the HP Web site.
Note
Printer drivers
In some cases, older drivers can be used with new printers. Because earlier (legacy) HP LaserJet printers might have different versions of the PCL language, new drivers are not supported with legacy printers. The drivers associated with each printer use the version of PCL language that is installed in the printer.
The PCL 5c drivers are only available on the Internet for the HP Color LaserJet 3700.
The printing system for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer includes the following printer drivers.
Note
PCL 6, and PS drivers
The following drivers are available for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer.
•
HP traditional PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
•
The HP traditional PS driver for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0.
•
HP PCL 5c, PCL 6, and PS unidrivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
All of the drivers provide access to the printer paper-handling and print-quality features, and are described in Chapter 3 of this guide.
If you select a Typical Installation during installation of the printing-system software, the PCL 6 driver is set as the default driver.
Windows 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and Server 2003 driver versions
The PCL 6 support for Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows
Server 2003 operating systems is provided by using the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer drivers for the HP Color
LaserJet 3700 series printer. For Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, the HP Color
LaserJet 3700 generic printer description (GPD) provides information about printer features for the PCL 6 driver. The
HP Color LaserJet 3700 PS printer description (PPD) provides PS feature support for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer.
If you are using an HP unidriver in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 environments, follow these steps to find driver version information:
1. Click Start.
2. Click Settings.
3. Click Printers (or Printers and Faxes in Windows XP and Windows Server 2003).
4. Right-click the printer icon.
5. Click Properties.
6. Click the About tab.
Macintosh and Macintosh-compatible system-driver versions
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing solution for Macintosh is composed of the Print Center for OS X and the Apple
LaserWriter for OS OS 9, which are provided with the operating system, and HP-created PPD files. The driver uses these files to determine the features and PS commands that the printer supports. Bidirectional support in AppleTalk and USB connections supports autoconfiguration of the software. The installable components are:
• the HP LaserJet Installer for Mac OS 9.
x, and Mac OS X.
• the HP LaserJet Screen Fonts Installer.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Printing-system components
87
•
SYSTEM/EXTENSIONS/PRINTER DESCRIPTIONS (for Mac OS 9.
x).
•
LIBRARY/PRINTERS/PPDS/CONTENTS/RESOURCES/LANGUAGE.LPROJ (for Mac OS X).
• the HP LaserJet Utility, an HP printer utility that is installed in the HP LaserJet folder of Mac OS 9.
x. The HP
LaserJet Utility provides configuration and management support for PS .
• online Help, an HTML-based printer and utility help that can be viewed through a browser or in the Macintosh OS
Help Center (English only).
• install notes.
Additional driver availability
Additional drivers are available from your HP distributor or from the Web site.
These drivers are:
•
OS/2 PCL 5c, OS/2 PS, and OS/2 PCL 6 printer drivers. The OS/2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS/2.
•
UNIX model scripts. For further information about UNIX drivers, click hp printer installation software at:
http://www.hp.com/support/net_printing
•
Linux drivers. For further information about Linux drivers for HP LaserJet printers, go to:
http://www.hp.com/go/linux
Or visit the HP Linux support home page at:
http://hp.sourceforge.net.
Additional productivity tools
HP Web Registration
You can use this component to register your HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer on the HP Web site or through email. After you have successfully installed the software, the installer prompts you to register your
HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer. Also, you can gain access to HP Web Registration from the HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM by clicking Register Product. You can choose to complete the online registration at that time or later. If you want to register your printer later, click Register Product from the HP Color LaserJet 3700 program group when you decide to complete your registration.
88
Printing-system components Software Technical Reference ENWW
HP Web JetAdmin
Use HP Web JetAdmin to manage HP Jetdirect connected printers within your intranet by using a browser. HP Web
JetAdmin is a browser-based management tool and should be installed only on the network administrator's computer.
When it is installed on a host server, any client can use HP Web JetAdmin through a supported Web browser (such as
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6.0, or Netscape Navigator 7.0, by browsing to the HP Web JetAdmin host.
HP Web JetAdmin 7.0 and later versions have the following features:
• task-oriented user interface that provides configurable views for network managers
• customizable user profiles that can be customized to let network administrators include only the function that is being viewed or used
• routing of instant e-mail notification of hardware failure, low supplies, and other printer problems to different people
• remote installation and management from anywhere by using only a standard Web browser
• advanced automatic discovery of peripherals on the network without manually typing information about each printer into a database
• simple integration into enterprise-management packages
• capacity to find peripherals based on parameters such as the Internet protocol (IP) address, color capability, and model name
• capacity to organize peripherals into logical groups, with an option that provides virtual office maps for easy navigation
HP Web JetAdmin can be used for access to the HP Embedded Web Server, ordering supplies, and remote firmware updates (for supported printers).
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM browser provides the following link to download the latest version of the HP Web JetAdmin software:
http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin
Software Technical Reference ENWW Printing-system components
89
Click support from the CD-ROM browser, and then click hp web jetadmin. The following table shows the supporting operating systems and hardware for HP Web JetAdmin.
Table 12: HP Web JetAdmin support
Protocols
Compatible operating systems
• TCP/IP
• IPX/SPX
•
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, Server, and
Advanced Server
•
Microsoft Windows XP Professional with service pack 1 and Windows Server 2003
• Microsoft Windows NT Server and Workstation with service pack 3 or later
• Red Hat Linux 8.0
• SuSE Linux v. 8.1
Supported products
Supported browsers
Supported printers
Shared print queue creation support
• Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional, Server and
Advanced Server
• Microsoft Windows XP Professional and Windows
Server 2003
•
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Server and Workstation
•
HP-UX 11.0
•
Red Hat Linux 8.0
•
Solaris 2.6, 7 and 8
•
SuSE Linux v 8.1
•
Novell NetWare 5.1 and 6.0 (IPX only) using
Netware Client 4.83 -- using HP Web JetAdmin only on a Microsoft Windows NT 4.0, Windows
2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 system
All HP and non-HP printers connected through HP
Jetdirect print servers, and standard MIB-compliant third-party network connected printers.
•
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6.0 (Windows only);
•
Netscape 7.0 (English) all operating systems
All HP and non-HP printers connected through HP
Jetdirect print servers, and standard MIB-compliant third-party network connected printers.
90
Printing-system components Software Technical Reference ENWW
3
Printer driver features
Introduction
This chapter describes the features of the the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer drivers. The chapter contains the following major sections:
•
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features. This section describes the PCL 6 drivers for Windows 98, Windows Me, and
Windows NT 4.0.
•
The HP traditional PS driver features. This section describes the PS driver for Windows 98, Windows Me, and
Windows NT 4.0.
•
PCL 6 and PS unidriver features. This section describes the PCL 6 and PS drivers for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
• Structure and availability of the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software CD-ROM. This section describes the three printing-system software CD-ROMs that are included with the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer.
• Driver feature comparison in Windows and Macintosh operating systems. The tables in this section provide an overview of printer driver features.
You can control print jobs from several places: the printer control panel, the software program, and the driver UI.
Generally, for features that are common to two or more of these places (for instance, you can select the media input tray from any of them), settings made at the printer control panel are overridden by settings made from within a software program, and settings made from within a software program are overridden by settings made to driver properties through the driver UI.
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
When you install the printer in Windows 98, Windows Me, or Windows NT 4.0, the HP traditional PCL 6 is used.
This section describes the options that are available on each tab of the HP traditional PCL 6 driver interfaces.
Access to drivers
To gain access to driver settings from within most software programs, click File, click Print, and then click Properties.
The appearance and names of the driver tabs that appear vary, depending on the printer model and the driver.
You can also control the drivers directly from your computer. IWindows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, and
Windows 2000, click Start, click Settings, click Printers, right-click the printer name, and then click Printing
Preferences or Document Defaults (depending on the OS and driver), to gain access to the same set of driver tabs that the software program controls.
If, after right-clicking the printer name, you click Properties, you gain access to a different set of tabs that control the driver and driver connections.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Introduction
91
Help system
The HP LaserJet 6 drivers include a full-featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
What's this? Help
What's this? Help is supported in Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0. You can gain access to What's this? Help messages in any of the following ways:
•
Right-click a control and click What's this?, and a pop-up Help window appears.
•
Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. Use this special cursor to select a control, and the pop-up Help window for that feature appears.
•
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
Press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, and context-sensitive Help appears.
Constraint messages
Constraint messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific actions you take. These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible given the capabilities of the printer or the current settings of other controls. For example, if you click Print on Both Sides and then change the paper type to transparencies, a message appears asking you to resolve this conflict.
Figure 25: A typical constraint message with an OK button
Whenever a constraint message appears with the OK or Cancel button, the interpretation of the button is as follows:
•
Clicking OK accepts the change that was just made, and the driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value.
•
Clicking Cancel rejects the change that was just made, and the control returns to its previous value.
92
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Bubble Help
Note
Note: As with Constraint messages, Bubble Help icons only appear in response to specific actions you take. For instance, if you click the Paper tab and select Transparency on the All Pages minitab, Bubble Help icons will appear on the Finishing tab.
Bubble Help features a graphical icon that resembles a cartoon speech bubble with a lowercase "i" in it, representing the international symbol for information. The following illustration shows Bubble Help icons on a driver tab.
Figure 26: A property page with Bubble Help icons
The bubble typically appears next to a disabled control, although it can also accompany an enabled control if there is an important note concerning its use. Moving the pointer over the bubble changes the arrow to a gloved hand, which indicates that the area underneath the pointer is selectable. When the bubble is selected by using either the mouse or the keyboard, a message box appears that contains a brief explanation about why the control is disabled and what can be done to enable it. If the control is not disabled, the message is a tip or a precaution you should be aware of when using that particular feature.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
93
Finishing tab features
The appearance of the Finishing tab changes, depending on the printer model and the installed paper-handling accessories. The following illustration shows the default appearance of the Finishing tab.
Figure 27: The default appearance of the Finishing tab
94
The Finishing tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets group box
•
Document Options group box
•
Document preview image
•
Print Quality group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on the Paper/Quality, Finishing, Effects, and Destination tabs. The feature is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all of the other tabs.
Print Task
Quick Sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications (such as paper size, pages per sheet, and so on).
For more information, see the "Print/Quality tab features" section of this guide.
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Document Options
The Document Options group box contains the following options.
•
Print on Both Sides
•
Flip Pages Up (available when the Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing) setting on the Device Settings tab is
Installed)
•
Correct Order for Rear Bin
•
Booklet Printing (Booklet Layout) in the PCL 6 driver. This option is available when the Duplex Unit (for 2-
Sided Printing) setting on the Device Settings tab is Installed)
•
Pages per Sheet
•
Print Page Borders (activated when Pages per Sheet setting is greater than 1)
•
Page Order (activated when the Pages per Sheet setting is greater than 1)
Print on Both Sides option
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Although the Print on Both Sides check box is always available, if you select Print on Both Sides along with incompatible settings, an Incompatible Print
Settings message appears. See the "Incompatible Print Settings" section of this guide for more information.
An Incompatible Print Settings message appears if you select Print on Both Sides along with any of the following settings.
On the Papertab
•
Transparency
•
Labels
•
Envelope
On the
Advanced tab under Paper Size
•
Double PostCard (JIS)
•
Envelope #10
•
Envelope B5
•
Envelope C5
•
Envelope DL
•
Envelope Monarch
Automatically printing on both sides
Use the duplexing unit in the printer to automatically print on two sides of the paper when that option is specified in the job . The HP Color LaserJet 3700dn and HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn come with a duplexing unit installed.
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer to use a group of printer settings (such as fuser temperature and print speed) to print the media with the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and a different print mode is associated with each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing unit is used.
Flip Pages Up
The Flip Pages Up check box, enabled only when Print on Both Sides is selected, is used to specify the duplexbinding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not selected. The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this box, depending on the paper orientation selected on the Basics tab.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
95
Table 13: Page orientation
Orientation (Basics tab)
Portrait
Landscape
Flip Pages Up selected
Short-edge binding
Long-edge binding
Flip Pages Up not selected
Long-edge binding
Short-edge binding
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing will occur on the back side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.
Booklet layout
The Booklet Layout drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides is selected, offers choices that are based on the current paper size. The default setting for the Booklet Layout drop-down menu is Off.
•
Left Edge Binding
•
Right Edge Binding
When you select Left Edge Binding or Right Edge Binding, the document preview image changes to show the location of the binding, and, if the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1, it automatically changes to 2.
You may change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to 4, 6, 9, or 16. See "Pages per Sheet" in the "HP traditional
PCL 6 and PS unidriver features" section of this document for more information.
Book and booklet printing
Book and booklet printing are both supported by the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer.
A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages that can have a different media type for the first page (front cover) or last page (back cover). Use the First Page and Back Cover options on the Paper/Quality tab (available when you select the Use different paper for first page check box) to select different media for the first and last pages.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media type. Use the Booklet Layout drop-down menu on the Finishing tab to control booklet settings.
Printing a Booklet using Booklet Layout
1. In your software program, click File, click Print, and then click Properties.
2. Click the Finishing tab. Click the Print on Both Sides check box to select it.
3. In the Booklet Layout drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want. The booklet printing type consists of the location of the binding (for example, Left Edge Binding).
96
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Printing a Book using Booklet Layout
A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages that can have a different media type of the first page (front cover) or the last page (back cover). The booklet cover must be the same size as the inside sheets. Follow these instructions for book printing.
1. In your software program, click File, click Print, and then click Properties.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then click the Use different paper check box to select it.
3. Click the First Page option. On the Source is: and Type is: menus, select the source and type settings for your cover.
4. Click the Other Pages option. On the Source is: and Type is: menus, select the source and type settings for the inside sheets of your print job.
5. Click the Back Cover option. The Add a blank back cover check box appears. If you select this check box, the
Source Is: and Type Is: menus appear. Select the source and type settings for the back cover.
Whenever you make changes to all of the pages (that is, when Use different paper is not selected), these changes are reflected in both the First Page and Other Pages settings whenever you set Use different paper.
The Back Cover option is not available when you select any Booklet Layout setting except Off, which is the default. When you use this feature, the last page of the print job is folded into the middle of the booklet.
Pages per Sheet
The
Pages per Sheet drop-down menu provides six settings: 1 (default), 2, 4, 6, 9 and 16.
Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page Order, which become active when the Pages Per Sheet setting is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders
When you select the Print Page Borders check box, a line is set around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
97
Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:
•
Right, then Down
•
Down, then Right
•
Left, then Down
•
Down, then Left
The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples in the following illustration.
Figure 28: Page-order preview images
•
2 pages per sheet
•
4 pages per sheet
•
6 pages per sheet
•
9 pages per sheet
•
16 pages per sheet
Document preview image
The preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Paper, Finishing, Effects, and Color tabs. For more information about the document preview image, see the "Paper tab features" section of this document.
Print Quality
The HP LaserJet printer driver Print Quality group box provides options that control resolution, graphics settings, and font settings.
The default setting for Print Quality is Default. To change the default print quality settings, click the Details button.
Clicking the Details button opens the Print Quality Detailsdialog box. The Print Quality Details dialog box has different options depending on the driver you are using.
98
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Print Quality Details for the PCL 6 driver
The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the PCL 6 driver as shown in the following illustration.
Figure 29: Print Quality Details dialog box for HP traditional PCL 6 driver
The following options are available.
•
Current Settings group box
•
Graphic Settings group box
•
Font Settings group box
•
Output Settings group box
Current Settings group box
The Current Settings group box has two states in the HP traditional PCL 6 driver:
•
This is the "Default" setting
•
This is a "Custom" setting
This is the "Default"" setting appears if you select Default Setting in the Print Quality group box on the Finishing tab.
This is a "Custom" setting appears if you select Custom in the Print Quality group box on the Finishing tab.
Graphics Settings group box
The Graphics Settings group box contains the Raster Compression: setting that allows you to select the compression method. The following settings are available:
•
Automatic The printer driver determines the best compression method to use
•
Best Quality The driver uses a "lossless" compression method to ensure that no data is lost during compression.
•
Maximum Compression The driver uses a compression method that might result in loss of data to achieve maximum compression.
This is the "Default" setting appears if you select Default Setting in the Print Quality group box on the Finishing tab.
This is a "Custom" setting appears if you select Custom in the Print Quality group box on the Finishing tab.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
99
Font Settings group box
In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which provides a safety net for programs that cannot easily use TrueType (TM) fonts for special graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.
Output Settings
The Output Settings group box contains controls for selecting resolution and other print-job settings, including pattern scaling and printing all text as black.
For the HP LaserJet PCL 6 driver, the Default values for output settings are as follows:
•
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) is selected
•
Print all Text as Black is not selected
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)
The Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature is implemented to address the moiré effect created when certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is on by default.
Print all Text as Black
The Print all Text as Black feature is off by default. When selected, this option causes the driver to print all text as black regardless of the original document text color. By design, however, white text remains white, as a fail-safe method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background. This setting does not affect graphic images on the page. Print all Text as Black remains selected only for the current print job. When the current print job is completed,
Print all Text as Black is automatically turned off.
100
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Effects tab features
The Effects tab is used to create unique paper effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following illustration shows the Effects tab.
Figure 30: Effects tab
The Effects tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets group box
•
Resizing Options group box
•
Document preview image
•
Watermarks group box
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
101
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on the Paper/Quality, Finishing, Effects, Destination, and Color tabs. The feature is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all of the other tabs. The print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as paper size and pages per sheet.
For more information, see the "Paper/Quality tab features" section of this guide.
Fit to Page group box
The Fit to Page group box contains the following controls.
•
Print Document on setting
•
Scale to Fit check box
•
% of Normal Size setting
Print Document On setting
Use Print Document On to format the document for one paper size, and then print the document on a different paper size, with or without scaling the page image to fit the new paper size.
You can disable the Print Document On control by creating of the following conditions:
•
Percent of Normal Size is not 100.
•
Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes supported by the selected media source, and any of the custom sizes that you have created (if the currently selected media source is manual, auto, or any tray). When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically selected.
102
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Scale to Fit option
The Scale to Fit option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target paper size.
By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is turned off, then the document page images are not scaled, and are instead centered at full size on the target paper. If the document size is larger than the target paper size, then the document image is clipped. If the document size is smaller, then it is centered within the target paper. The following illustration shows preview images for a document formatted for Legal paper with the Print Document On option selected, and the target size specified as Letter.
Figure 31: Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size, the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size.
% of Normal Size option
The
% of Normal Size option provides a slider bar for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100 percent of the normal size. The normal size is defined as the paper size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does not negotiate the paper size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer.
The limits of the range are from 25 percent to 400 percent, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upper-left corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator is dragged, and the preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the scroll bar arrows increases or decreases the scale by one percent. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10 percent.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator at the default Windows resolution; use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the desired value, and then use the scroll bar arrows to refine the value.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
•
Print Document On is selected.
•
Pages per Sheet is not 1.
Watermarks
The
Watermarks group box contains the following controls.
•
Watermarks drop-down menu
•
First Page Only check box
•
Edit button (Opens the Watermark Details dialog box)
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
103
Watermarks drop-down menu
Use the Watermarks settings to choose a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or to edit an existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
•
(none)
•
Confidential
•
Draft
•
SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any watermark selected from this list appears in the preview image.
First Page Only check box
When First Page Only is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The First Page
Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is "(none)".
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
104
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Edit button (Watermark Details)
Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears. The following illustration shows the Watermark Details dialog box.
Figure 32: Watermark Details
The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and the font attributes.
Click OK to accept all of the changes made in the Watermark Details dialog box. Clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark, and then select a different watermark or click
New, all of the changes made to the previous watermark are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.
The Watermark Details dialog box contains the following controls.
• Current Watermarks group box
• Watermark Message text box
• Message Angle group box
• Font Attributes group box
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
105
Note
Current Watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined watermarks made available in the driver and any new watermarks you have created. To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you name it. To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box. To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.
You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time. When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled, and a Bubble Help message appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to enable it.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the Watermark
Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each with a different font or size. When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2). When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique.
Message Angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in a diagonal, horizontal, or angle (custom) orientation to the text on the page. The default is Diagonal. All three settings automatically center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement. Diagonal places the text along a line that spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.
Document preview image
The preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Paper, Finishing, Effects, and Color tabs. For more information about the document preview image, see the "Paper/Quality tab features" section of this document.
106
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Font Attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the color, shading, size, and style of the font.
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls.
• Name drop-down menu
• Color drop-down menu
• Shading drop-down menu
• Size spin box
• Style drop-down menu
Name
The Name drop-down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is languagedependent.
Color
The Color drop-down menu lists the fixed, unalterable color choices for the watermark. The default setting for new and preset watermarks is Gray. Color options are the following:
•
Gray
•
Red
•
Yellow
•
Green
•
Cyan
•
Blue
•
Magenta
Shading
The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu.
•
Lightest
•
Very Light (default)
•
Light
•
Medium Light
•
Medium
•
Medium Dark
•
Dark
•
Very Dark
•
Darkest
These values represent the intensity of the color selected in the Color attribute setting.
Size
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size for new watermarks is 80 points. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
107
Style
The choice of Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic is available from the Style drop-down menu. The default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.
Paper tab features
Use the Paper tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media, as well as to define a custom paper size. If you want to, you can use this tab to indicate different paper-selection choices for the first page and back cover of the document. The following illustration shows the Paper tab.
Figure 33: Paper tab
108
The Paper tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets group box
•
Document preview image
•
Printer image
•
All Pages mini-tab set
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
The first group box in the upper-left portion of the Paper tab view is Print Task Quick Sets. This feature is described in the "Finishing tab features" section. Any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the Paper tab affects the group box on the Finishing tab. They are the same option.
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on all of the Document Defaults driver tabs (the Finishing, Effects,
Paper, Basics, and Color tabs). The feature is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all other tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as paper size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this guide.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the Document Defaults and driver tabs (the Finishing, Effects,
Paper, Basics, and Color tabs). For more information about the document preview image, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this document.
Note
Printer image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Paper tab represents the current physical configuration of the printer and corresponds to its configuration data, which is either obtained automatically through bidirectional communication or configured manually. It should look the same as the image that appears in the same location on the Configure tab.
On the Paper tab, the printer image contains hot spots where you can select a paper source. When the pointer moves over a hot spot, the arrow reverts a gloved hand. The current paper source, whether selected from the drop-down menu or from a printer-image hot spot, is highlighted in bright green on the printer image.
•
The
Auto Select setting in the Source is: drop-down menu does not have a corresponding area to highlight in the printer image. Selecting other settings in this menu highlights the corresponding part in the printer image.
•
Printer-image hotspots on the printer's trays in the bitmapped image are linked to the corresponding tray in the
Source is: option. Manual Feed, which is available from the Source is: option, cannot be selected by selecting the bitmap.
•
On the Paper tab, only Tray 1 has printer-image hot spots.
The printer image shown in the following illustration might differ from your HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer, depending on the model number and accessory devices.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
109
All Pages mini-tab set
The controls on this mini-tab are contained in an All Pages mini-tab. As the name implies, this means that the settings specified on that mini-tab apply to all pages of the document. The following illustration shows the First Page mini-tab set.
Figure 34: First Page, Other Pages, and Back Cover mini-tabs
When you select the Use different paper for first page check box, the All Pages mini-tab is replaced by three minitabs. These three mini-tabs are:
•
First Page, which contains the same controls as All Pages.
•
Other Pages, which contains different controls, as noted in the following sections.
•
Back Cover, which also contains different controls, as noted in the following sections.
The following illustration shows the First Page mini-tab.
110
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 35: First Page, Other Pages, and Back Cover mini-tabs
Using the First Page and Other Pages mini-tabs
A cover can have two forms, depending on the type of booklet a user is printing:
•
For full-size (e.g., LETTER size, plain Letter type) book, select a different media for the first page and add an extra blank back page. The front cover can contain print or be a blank page, and can either be pulled from a different paper source or be of another media type. The back cover can be printed on a different media from the front cover.
• For two-page-per-sheet (2-up) booklet printing, a cover is obtained by selecting a different media for the first page only. The back cover setting is hidden, because this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
Whenever you make changes to all pages (that is, when Use different paper for first page is not selected), these changes are reflected in both the First Page and Other Pages settings whenever the user selects the Use different
paper for first page
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
111
First Page mini-tab
The All Pages mini-tab turns into three mini-tabs when you select the Use different paper for first page check box:
First Page, Other Pages, and Back Cover. The First Page mini-tab is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 36: First Page mini-tab
112
The First Page mini-tab contains the following controls.
•
Use different paper for first page check box
•
Size is: drop-down menu
•
Custom button, which opens the Custom Paper Size dialog box
Use different paper for first page check box
To select different media for the first page of most print jobs, follow these steps:
1. Click File, click Print, and then click Properties.
2. Click the Paper tab, and then select the Use different paper for first page check box.
3. Click the First Page tab. In the Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: drop-down menus, select the size, source, and type settings for your cover.
Size is: drop-down menu
This feature actually functions as two controls: a drop-down menu that contains all the supported media sizes
(including any user-defined custom sizes) and a text label that indicates the dimensions of the selected size.
Moving the pointer over the text label causes the arrow to change to a gloved hand, which indicates that the area beneath the pointer is selectable. Clicking here toggles the units of measure between inches and millimeters, offering the same options on the dimensions label in the preview image. Selecting a new size from the drop-down menu updates the media-dimensions text label as well as the preview image. Changing the orientation on the Basics tab also updates the dimensions of the text label.
Size can be specified only for the first page or for all pages. On the Other Pages and Back Cover mini-tabs, the Size
is drop-down menu does not appear because the media size must be consistent for all pages of the job. Certain software programs can override this command and specify different media sizes within a single document. Any change in the media size selection causes the Booklet Printing feature to be turned off.
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Custom button
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper tab. The following illustration shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.
Figure 37: Custom Paper Size dialog box
Note
Name drop-down menu
The Name drop-down menu displays the name of the custom paper size that was most recently selected. You may also use the Name drop-down menu to type new names for custom paper sizes and to select from the list of currently defined custom paper sizes.
The name that appears in the Name drop-down menu varies, depending on user choices:
•
If you select a custom paper size from the drop-down menu and do not change the other options, the name that appears is the name of the last selected custom paper size that was selected most recently.
•
If you select or save a custom paper size and then change the width or height controls, or if you delete a custom paper size, then the name that appears is "Untitled".
•
If you type a new name into the Name drop-down menu in order to save a new size or to rename an existing size, then the new name will remain until another custom paper size has been selected.
If you wish to create a new custom paper size and begin by typing in a new name, then change the height or width values, you must click the Save button for changes in the name, height or width values to be saved. If an existing custom paper size name is selected from the drop-down menu before you click the Save button, the unsaved name and size values are replaced by the values of the custom paper size you just selected.
If you try to save a custom paper size with the name of one that already exists, a dialog box will appear asking if it's
OK to overwrite the existing custom paper size. (The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom paper names, and not against the standard paper-size names.) If you click Yes, the existing custom paper size is updated with the new values. If you click No, the driver returns to the Custom Paper Size dialog box, where you may enter a different name.
In Windows 98 and Windows Me, media names are case-sensitive. For example, "big" and "BIG" can both be used as names. In Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, and Windows XP, media names are not case sensitive. Both upper and lower-case names can be used, but they cannot be used as names for the same paper size.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
113
Save button
Figure 38: Save button with dynamic label
Note
The button circled in the illustration above is dynamic in that it may have one of three possible labels ( Save,
Delete, or Rename), depending on user choices.
•
Save: When you select an existing custom paper size, or when you change the height or width setting, the button is labeled Save.
•
Delete: After you select or save an existing custom paper size, the button is labeled Delete.
•
Rename: When you select an existing custom paper size, and then type into the Name drop-down menu, the button is labeled Rename.
Width and height controls
The width and height values can be changed either by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes, or by using the up and down arrows.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry. See the "Custom width and height control limits" section of this guide.
If units are in millimeters, the custom paper-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the nearest whole millimeter. The custom paper-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the nearest whole millimeter. Any nonnumerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries are validated when the focus has changed.
The resolution of each control is one millimeter or one-tenth of an inch, depending on the current measurement units.
Clicking the up and down arrows increases or decreases the current value by the increment amount (within the allowed range of values). The computer determines the rate at which the values change.
114
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Use Millimeters/Use Inches button
Figure 39: Use millimeters/ Use Inches button
Use the button circled in the preceding illustration to toggle the unit of measurement between standard (inches) and metric (millimeters) units of measurement.
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum paper size for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer is 98 mm by 191 mm (3.86 inches by 7.5
inches) and the maximum is 311 mm by 469 mm (12.23 inches by 18.5 inches). The following table summarizes paper size limits for each paper-handling device.
Table 14: Custom width and height limits for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer
Media source or paper-handling accessory
Tray 1 (multipurpose)
Minimum size - width by height Maximum size - width by height
98 mm by 191 mm 306 mm by 469 mm
Tray 2
Tray 3
Duplex printing accessory
(3.86 inches by 7.5 inches)
148 mm by 210 mm
(5.83 inches by 8.27 inches)
148 mm by 210 mm
(5.83 inches by 8.27 inches)
148 mm by 210 mm
(5.83 inches by 8.27 inches)
(12.05 inches by 18.5 inches)
296 mm by 432 mm
(11.69 inches by 17.0 inches)
296 mm by 432 mm
(11.69 inches by 17.0 inches)
311 mm by 469 mm
(12.28 inches by 18.5 inches)
Paper and envelope icons
The paper and envelope icons visually define width and height.
Close button
The Close button closes the Custom Paper Size dialog box according to the logic in the following table. In all cases, any custom paper sizes that are successfully saved (and not renamed or deleted) while the dialog box is open will remain in the paper size list in the Paper tab. The following table lists options that appear when you click the Close button.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
115
Table 15: Close dialog box text strings
If the drop-down menu contains ...
Untitled Save
And the button says ...
<user-typed text>
<name of saved item>
<user-typed text>
Save
Delete
Rename
Then this happens when the
Close button is clicked
The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.
The current paper size remains the same as it was when the
Custom
button was selected.
The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.
The current paper size remains the same as it was when the
Custom
button was selected.
The dialog box closes, and the current paper size is set to that which was last shown in the dropdown menu.
The dialog box closes, but you lose the changes that were not saved.
The current paper size remains the same as it was when the
Custom
button was selected.
Source is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the paper source to use for printing a document. Different printer models support different paper sources. The list of paper sources depends on the printer model and its accessories. Any optional paper trays that are installed through the Configure tab are also shown here.
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options:
•
Auto Select
•
Manual Feed
•
Tray 1
•
Tray 2 (500-sheet tray)
•
Tray 3 (500-sheet tray)
The default setting is Auto Select. When this setting is selected, the printer uses the paper tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a paper source other than Auto Select, make sure that the correct paper size is loaded in the paper source.
If a conflict exists among paper source, size, and type, and you choose to keep the conflicting settings, the settings are processed in the following order: paper size, paper type, and then paper source.
For information about media sizes and types, see the “Media attributes” section of this guide.
116
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Type Is:
The Type Is: drop-down menu shows all the paper types that the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer supports, as well as any user-defined types that have been created by a network administrator. The default setting is Unspecified, which allows the program to select the paper type.
No mechanism exists for manually adding custom paper types through the driver. Custom sizes can be added only by using the bidirectional communication mechanism, so they must already exist in the printer when the bidirectional query occurs. If bidirectional communication is enabled, then the information returned is an updated list of paper types.
If bidirectional communication is not enabled, then the driver looks for custom paper types saved from a previous bidirectional communication query, and uses those. Otherwise, no custom paper types are available through the driver.
The following standard types appear in the lists:
•
Bond
•
Cardstock (> 163 g/m
2
)
•
Color
•
Glossy (75 - 105 g/m
2
)
•
Envelope
•
Heavy (106 - 163 g/m
2
)
•
Heavy Glossy
•
Labels
•
Letterhead
•
Light (< 75 g/m
2
)
•
Plain
•
Preprinted
•
Prepunched
•
Recycled
•
Tough Paper
•
Transparency
•
Unspecified
For more information about media types and sizes, see the "Media attributes" section of this guide.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
117
Other Pages mini-tab
Use the Other Pages mini-tab to select an alternative media type or source for the pages that follow the first page of a document. The following illustration shows the Other Pages mini-tab.
Figure 40: Other Pages mini-tab
The Other Pages mini-tab contains the following controls.
•
Source is: drop-down menu
•
Type is: drop-down menu
118
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Source is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the paper source to use for printing a document. Different printer models support different paper sources. The list of paper sources depends on the printer model and its accessories. Any optional paper trays that are installed through the Configure tab are also shown here. For more information about the Source
is: setting, see the First Page mini-tab section of this guide.
Type is: drop-down menu
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all the paper types that the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer supports, as well as any user-defined types that have been created by a network administrator. The default setting is Unspecified, which allows the program to select the paper type. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the First Page mini-tab section of this guide.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
119
Back Cover mini-tab
Use this feature to include a blank back cover on a document, or include a back cover from a paper source different from that used for the remainder of the document. Use the Back Cover mini-tab to select an alternative media source
(or the same source as
First Page) from which a blank page is drawn and placed after the final page of the body of the document. The following illustration shows the Back Cover mini-tab.
Figure 41: Back Cover mini-tab
120
The Back Cover mini-tab is not available when Booklet Printing: is enabled on the Finishing tab.
The mini-tab contains three option buttons and two drop-down menus. Three option buttons are available:
•
No back Cover option button (default)
•
Use the first page source option button
•
Use an alternate source option button
No back Cover option button
No back Cover is selected as the default. The drop-down Source is and Type is drop-down menus are disabled, but their values are not changed. No Bubble Help is available for the inactive drop-down menus. The settings revert to defaults when Use different paper for first page is selected again.
Use the first page source option button
Clicking Use the first page source changes the value of the Source is: and Type is: drop-down menus to match the first page, if necessary, but the drop-down menus are inactive.
Use an alternate source option button
Clicking Use an alternate source activates the drop-down menus. The drop-down menu value defaults to the same source as that chosen for the First Page mini-tab.
The two drop-down menus become available when Use an alternate source is selected:
•
Source is: drop-down menu (default)
•
Type is: drop-down menu
Source is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the paper source to use for printing a document. Different printer models support different paper sources. The list of paper sources depends on the printer model and its accessories. Any optional
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
paper trays that are installed through the Configure tab are also shown here. For more information about the Source
Is: setting, see the "First Page mini-tab" section of this guide.
Type is: drop-down menu
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all the paper types that the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer supports, as well as any user-defined types that have been created by a network administrator. The default setting is Unspecified, which allows the program to select the paper type. For more information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the "First Page mini-tab" section of this guide.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
121
Basics tab features
The Basics tab provides options for setting the number of copies to be printed and for the orientation of the print job.
You can also use it to retrieve information about the driver.
Figure 42: Basics tab
122
The
Basics tab contains the following controls.
• Print Task Quick Sets group box
• Copies group box
• Orientation group box
• Document preview image
• About button
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on all of the Document Defaults driver tabs (the Finishing, Effects,
Paper, Basics, and Color tabs). The feature is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all other tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as paper size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this guide.
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Copies
Use the Copies feature to specify the number of copies to print.
The number of copies you request appears in the Copies box. You can select the number by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the edit box. Valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999 for the HP Color
LaserJet 3700 series printer. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group box or leave the Basics tab, invalid entries in the edit box (such as non-numerical input or numbers less than 1) are changed to the last valid value that appeared in the box. The default number of copies is 1.
Because you can set the number of copies you want from some programs, conflicts between the program you are using and the driver can arise. In most cases, the program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not take place, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in the program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the manner in which media is fed into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job. The three available orientations are portrait, landscape, and rotated. The default orientation is Portrait.
The three orientation options have these configurations:
•
Portrait. The top edge of the document is the shorter edge of the paper.
•
Landscape. The top edge of the document is the longer edge of the paper.
•
Rotate by 180 degrees. This creates a landscape or portrait orientation in which the image is rotated 180 degrees. This setting is useful for printing envelopes and when using some third-party paper-handling devices.
You can can toggle orientation between portrait and landscape by left-clicking the preview image. If you select the
Rotate by 180 degrees check box, there is no change in the preview image.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the Document Defaults driver tabs (the Finishing, Effects, Paper,
Basics, and Color tabs). For more information about the document preview image, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this document.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
123
Color tab features
Use the Color tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments and half-toning. Color output can also be converted to grayscale. The Color tab is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 43: Color tab
124
The Color tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets group box
•
Document preview image
•
Color Options group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on all of the Document Defaults or Printing Preferences driver tabs
(the Finishing, Effects, Paper, Basics, and Color tabs). The feature is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all other tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as paper size and pages per sheet. For more information, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this guide.
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Document preview image
The document preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the Document Defaults or Printing Preferences driver tabs (the
Finishing, Effects, Paper, Basics, and Color tabs). For more information about the document preview image, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this document.
Color options
Use the Color Options group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the print job's color rendering and print quality.
To use default color settings, click the Automatic option button. To change the default color settings, click the Manual option button and then click the Settings button. To convert color information to grayscale and print the document in black and white, select the Print in Grayscale checkbox.
Manual color settings
When you click the Settings . . . option button, the Color Settings dialog box appears. The default settings are shown in the following illustration. To change the settings, make your selections using the drop-down menus in the
Color
Settings dialog box, and then click OK. You are then prompted to save your selections as Custom or manual settings.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
125
Figure 44: Manual Color Options dialog box
The Manual Color Options dialog box gives you independent control of neutral grays and halftone for three major components: text, graphics, and photographs.
The Neutral Grays drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is embedded in the printer firmware. The options are Black Only or 4-Color. You can adjust the Neutral Grays setting independently for text, graphics, or photographs.
•
Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and blacks) using only black toner, which ensures that neutral colors do not have a color cast.
•
4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black.
126
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
The Halftone settings control the selection of a device-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded in the printer firmware. The Halftone options, Detail andSmooth, affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You can independently adjust halftone settings for text, graphics, and photos.
•
Detail. This option is optimized for the best reproduction of normal to small text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors. Choose this option when the sharp edges of small objects, especially those that contain secondary colors (such as red, green, and blue), are the top priority.
•
Smooth. This option is optimized for the best reproduction of images, graphics, and large, solid-filled print ares. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option when the color fidelity of large objects is the top priority.
The RGB Color settings affect the color treatment for object types and determines how colors are rendered. The options are Default (sRGB), Vivid , and Device.
•
Default (sRGB). This option interprets RGB color as standard default RGB color space (sRGB), which is the accepted standard for many software companies and organizations such as Microsoft and the Worldwide Web
Consortium.
•
Vivid. This option sets the printer to increase the color saturation in the midtones. Less colorful objects are rendered more colorfully. This value is recommended for printing business graphics.
•
Device. This option sets the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render photographs properly when this option is selected, you must manage color in the software program in which you are working or in the operating system.
If your software application converts text and graphics to raster, the Photographs settings also control the Text
and Graphics settings.
The General group box has edge-control settings settings. Edge Control and RGB Color. Edge control, which determines how edges are rendered, consists of two components: adaptive halftoning and trapping. Adaptive halftoning increases the edge sharpness of text and graphics while maintaining the quality of area fills. Trapping reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects. The following options are available:
•
Off, which sets trapping and adaptive halftoning to Off.
•
Light, which provides minimal trapping. Adaptive halftoning is set to On.
•
Normal, which provides the default Trapping setting. Adaptive halftoning is set to On.
•
Maximum, which provides the most trapping. Adaptive halftoning is set to On.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
127
Printer Properties Tabs
About tab
The About This Driver dialog box appears when:
•
You click the About tab in Printer Properties tab
•
You click the HP logo on any of the HP traditional PCL6 driver property pages
The following figure shows the About This Driver dialog box. The information it contains varies according to
HP LaserJet model number, driver, date, and versions.
Figure 45: About This Driver dialog box
The About tab indicates whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.
To close the About box, click OK, press Esc, press Alt + F4, or press Enter.
128
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
NT Forms tab features
The NT Forms tab can be found in the Properties for the printer driver.
To gain access to the printer driver Properties, click Start in the Windows task bar, click Settings, and then click
Printers. Right-click the printer name, and then click Properties.
The NT Forms tab appears only in the Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 operating environment. The NT Forms tab (like the
Configure tab) can be viewed only from the Properties window. The following illustration shows the NT Forms tab.
Figure 46: Driver NT Forms tab
Use the NT Forms tab to specify which media sizes and types are loaded in each of the available paper trays. This constrains the choices available in the Size is: and Type is: lists on the Paper tab. This constraint prevents information overload if you request unavailable sizes or types.
The NT Forms tab contains a single group box, the Form/Tray Assignments group box, which contains the following controls.
•
Available Trays: is a drop-down menu that contains all the printer trays that are specified on the Configure tab.
•
The This Tray Contains: Size (Forms): drop-down menu contains a list of standard paper sizes the HP Color
LaserJet 3700 series printer supports, as well as any custom forms that are defined in the NT Forms tab.
•
This Tray Contains: Type: drop-down menu lists all of the media types that the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer supports.
•
The
Clear All button removes all the size and type constraints on the Paper tab.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
129
Configuring the trays
1. Select the appropriate tray from the Available Trays: list.
2. Use the This Tray Contains: Size (Forms): drop-down menu to select the paper size (or form) that is loaded in that tray.
3. Use the This Tray Contains: Type: drop-down menu to select the paper type that is configured for the tray.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the remaining trays.
5. If necessary, click the Clear All button to reconfigure all the trays, and remove the size and type constraints that have been imposed on the Paper tab.
Note
Configure tab features
The Configure tab can be found in the Properties for the HP traditional printer driver.
To gain access to the printer driver Properties, click Start on your Window task bar, click Settings, and then click
Printers. Right-click the printer name, and then click Properties.
Use the Configure tab to tell the driver about the hardware configuration of the printer. If bidirectional communication is enabled in a supported environment, set up this tab by clicking the Update Now button. If your environment does not support bidirectional communication, the Update Now button is unavailable, so you must manually configure the options on this tab.
The Configure tab is available when the driver is opened from the Printers folder by clicking Properties. When you open the driver from within a program, the Configure tab is not visible (with a few exceptions, such as when using
Excel 5.0 or Corel (R) Chart 4.0). When opened from the Printers folder, the Configure tab looks like the following illustration.
Figure 47: Configure tab
130
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
The Configure tab contains the following controls.
•
Printer Model group box
•
Paper Handling Options group box
•
Optional Paper Sources: drop down box
•
Other Options group box
•
Automatic Configuration group box
• Printer image
Printer Model group box
In the Printer Model group box, the driver title remains HP Color LaserJet 3700 for all models. Selection of another printer bundle makes the appropriate changes to other configuration options on the tab.
Printer model defaults
The following are the default settings for each printer model in the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer series.
HP Color LaserJet 3700
When the HP LaserJet 3700 is selected, the following settings apply.
On the Configure tab
•
The Duplexing Unit check box is not selected.
•
The Allow Manual Duplexing check box is selected.
•
Optional Paper Sources is set to None.
•
PPM is set to 20.
On the More Configuration Options dialog box
When you click the More button in the Other Options group box on the Configure tab, the More Configuration
Options dialog box appears. The following defaults are found here.
•
The Font DIMM(s) check box is not selected; the Configure button is not not available.
•
The Total Memory value is 64 MB.
•
The value shown in the DWS dialog box is 6.00 MB
•
The Allow Scaling from Large Paper check box is available and not selected.
•
The Include Types in Application Source List check box is selected.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
131
132
HP Color LaserJet 3700n
When the HP LaserJet 3700n is selected, the following settings apply.
On the Configure tab
•
The Duplexing Unit check box is not selected.
•
The Allow Manual Duplexing check box is selected.
•
Optional Paper Sources is set to None.
•
PPM is set to 25.
On the More Configuration Options dialog box
When you click the More button in the Other Options group box on the Configure tab, the More Configuration
Options dialog box appears. The following defaults are found here.
•
The Font DIMM(s) check box is not selected; the Configure button is not available.
•
The Total Memory value is 64 MB.
•
The value shown in the DWS dialog box is 6.00 MB
•
The Allow Scaling from Large Paper check box is available and is not selected.
•
The Include Types in Application Source List check box is selected.
HP Color LaserJet 3700dn
When the HP LaserJet 3700dn is selected, the following settings apply.
On the Configure tab
•
The Duplexing Unit check box is not selected.
•
The Allow Manual Duplexing check box is selected.
•
Optional Paper Sources: is set to None.
•
The Printer Memory value is 64 MB.
•
PPM is set to 25.
On the More Configuration Options dialog box
When you click the
More button in the Other Options group box on the Configure tab, the More Configuration
Options dialog box appears. The following defaults are found here.
•
The Font DIMM(s) check box is not selected; the Configure button is not available.
•
The Total Memory value is 64 MB.
•
The value shown in the DWS dialog box is 6.00 MB
•
The Allow Scaling from Large Paper check box is available and is not selected.
•
The Include Types in Application Source List check box is selected.
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn
When the HP LaserJet 3700dtn is selected, the following settings apply:
On the Configure tab
•
The Duplexing Unit check box is not selected.
•
The Allow Manual Duplexing check box is selected.
•
Optional Paper Sources is set to HP 500-Sheet Paper Tray.
•
The Printer Memory value is 128 MB.
•
PPM is set to 25.
On the More Configuration Options dialog box
When you click the More button in the Other Options group box on the Configure tab, the More Configuration
Options dialog box appears. The following defaults are found here.
•
The Font DIMM(s) check box is not selected; the Configure button is not available.
•
The Total Memory value is 128 MB.
•
The value shown in the DWS dialog box is 6.00 MB
•
The Allow Scaling from Large Paper check box is available and is not selected.
•
The Include Types in Application Source List check box is selected.
Paper-handling options
The Paper Handling Options group box contains the following controls.
•
Duplexing Unit check box
•
Allow Manual Duplexing check box
•
Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu
Duplexing unit
Select this option if a duplexing unit is installed in the printer. When it is selected, additional controls appear in the
Document Options group box on the Finishing tab. Unlike most options in this group box, the Duplexing Unit option does not affect the printer image because the duplexing unit is contained within the printer. To print on both sides, click
Print from the program, click the Properties button, click the Finishing tab, and then click Print on Both Sides.
Allow Manual Duplexing
With manual duplexing, you can print on both sides of any size or weight of paper (although this is not recommended for transparencies). When you use this feature, the printer prints out one side of the paper for each page of the job.
You must reinsert the paper stack into the input tray (Tray 1) to print the second side. The printer pauses while you make this adjustment. The Allow Manual Duplexing check box on the Configure tab is selected by default for all models of the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
133
Optional Paper Destinations
The Optional Paper Destinations drop-down menu contains the following options:
Optional Paper Sources
The Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu lists optional paper sources for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer. The list of available paper sources varies, depending on your printer, its input accessories, and the printer configuration settings on the Configure tab.
For the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer, one optional paper source are available. The settings in the
Optional
Paper Sources drop-down menu are as followings:
• (None) (the default setting for the HP Color LaserJet 3700, 3700n, and 3700dn printers)
• HP 500-Sheet Paper Tray (the default setting for the HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer)
Other options
The Other Options group box contains a single command button,More. Clicking the More... button opens the More
Configuration Options dialog box.
More configuration options
When you press the More... button under Other Options, more configuration options are available. The More
Configuration Options dialog box is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 48: More Configuration Options dialog box
134
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
The More Configuration Options dialog box contains the following controls.
•
Fonts group box
•
Printer Memory group box
•
Allow Scaling from Large Paper check box
•
Include Types in Application Source List check box
Fonts
The Fonts group box contains a Font DIMM check box and a corresponding Configure button. Selecting the Font
DIMM check box tells the driver that a Font DIMM is installed, and that stored data about the fonts on the DIMM is available. When the check box is selected, the Configure button is enabled. Click the Configure button to open the
Configure Font DIMMs dialog box. If the Font DIMM check box was not selected when you opened the More
Configuration Options dialog box, selecting that check box automatically opens the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box.
Figure 49: Configure Font DIMMs dialog box
Use the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box to perform the following tasks:
•
Add up to two font DIMMs by clicking the Add button.
•
Specify a unique font DIMM name.
•
Select specific font DIMM data files that contain lists of fonts on specified DIMMs.
•
Select one or more installed DIMMs in the Installed DIMM list, and based on the selected DIMM(s). The list to the right (Fonts on DIMM) shows all of the fonts available on the selected DIMM(s).
•
Enable or disable one or more of the selected font(s).
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PCL 6 driver features
135
Note
Use the following procedure to configure a font DIMM.
1. Make sure that the font DIMM is properly installed.
2. Click Add. The Add Font DIMM dialog box appears.
3. Click Browse. The Font DIMM Files dialog box appears.
4. Find and select the appropriate Printer Cartridge Metrics (PCM) file that came with the font DIMM.
5. Click Open.
6. If you want to, specify a Font DIMM Name in the Add Font DIMM dialog box.
7. Click OK. The selected printer cartridge metrics (PCM) file appears in the Installed DIMMs list. Select the PCM file to see a list of available fonts in the Fonts on DIMM list.
8. Click OK to close the Add Font DIMM dialog box. The fonts on the DIMM should now be available on the system.
When using font DIMMs with the PCL 6 drivers: To install screen fonts that match the font DIMM, use the HPB file specifically designed to work with that DIMM. If there are no screen fonts for the DIMM, use the PCM file specifically designed to work with that DIMM.
Printer memory
Total Memory shows the total amount of memory physically installed in the printer. The default values for total printer memory are based on the printer model and are specified in the Printer Model setting of the Configuration tab. Total printer memory is updated through a successful bidirectional query, or can be set manually.
The (DWS) value shows the amount of memory available for keeping track of fonts that are downloaded from the driver. The driver deletes downloaded fonts if it has exceeded the available memory value. The (DWS) value is a dynamic value that varies, depending on the product, the product model, the specific configuration of the printer, and the print job. An accurate (DWS) value optimizes driver performance.
The (DWS) value is configured automatically by the PCL 6 drivers in Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0
environments that support bidirectional communication. Use the (DWS) option to specify the amount of work-space memory that is available to the printer. To manually set the (DWS) value, print a configuration page and find the DWS value in the Memory section of the configuration page. Then, click the More... button on the Configuration tab, and type the DWS value in the (DWS) field of the More Configuration Options dialog box. The (DWS) value might change if you switch printer-model settings.
Note
Include types in application source list
When the Include types in application source list check box is selected, all paper types (such as envelopes and transparencies) are available from the Source is: list on the Paper tab. When you are in an application (also called a program), you can open the Paper tab by clicking Print from the File menu, and then clicking Properties.
This option is available only when using a computer that is running Windows NT 4.0.
Automatic configuration
If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer since installation, click the
Update
Now button to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver. For more information about the Driver
Automatic Configuration feature, see the "Driver Autoconfiguration" section of this guide.
136
HP traditional PCL 6 driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Printer image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Configure tab represents the current physical configuration of the printer according to the driver configuration data (which can be obtained automatically through bidirectional communication, or configured manually in the Paper-Handling Options group box). It should have the same appearance as the image in the same location on the Paper tab.
The printer image shown in the illustration might differ from your HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer, depending on the model number and the installed accessory devices.
Adobe PostScript (R) 3 (TM) emulation support for the
HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer
Note
A set of 92 Adobe PostScript 3 emulation (PS) soft fonts is included with the printing-system software. If you want to permanently install the fonts in the printer, PS fonts are also available from HP in an optional font DIMM. The PS emulation maintains full compatibility with Adobe PS when PS fonts are purchased from Adobe.
Users of Adobe-licensed programs might also have the right to use the Adobe PS printer drivers from Adobe with the
HP LaserJet printer PostScript 3 emulation PPD, available on the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer software CD-ROM or from the HP Web site. When using the Adobe PS printer driver, users must comply with all Adobe licensing agreements, as stated on the Adobe Web site at:
http://www.adobe.com/support/downloads/license.html
See the "Font support" section of this guide for a list of the additional fonts.
The driver interface shown in this section is for Windows NT 4.0. The order and appearance of tabs can vary among operating systems.
HP traditional PS driver features
This section provides information about the features of the HP traditional PS printer driver.
What's this Help
Windows 98 Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0, What's this? Help is supported. You can gain access to What's this?
Help messages in any of the following ways:
•
Right-click a control and click What's this?, and a pop-up Help window appears.
•
Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. Use this special cursor to select a control, and the pop-up Help window for that feature appears.
•
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Adobe PostScript (R) 3 (TM) emulation support for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer
137
Page Setup tab features
The Page Setup tab in the PS Default Document Properties controls paper and finishing options for the
HP traditional PS driver. The following illustration shows the Page Setup tab.
Figure 50: Page Setup tab
The
Page Setup tab contains the following controls.
•
Paper Size drop-down menu
•
Paper Source drop-down menu
•
Copy Count spin box
•
Orientation group box
•
Print on Both Sides (Duplex Printing) group box (This option appears for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printers by default and for the HP Color LaserJet 3700dn and 3700dtn printers, for which a duplexer is standard).
•
Color Appearance group box
138
HP traditional PS driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Advanced tab features
Figure 51: Advanced tab
The Advanced tab for the HP traditional PS printer driver contains the following controls.
•
Paper/Output
•
Graphic
•
Document Options
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PS driver features
139
Note
Device Settings tab
NOTE:
The Device Settings tab can be found in the Properties for the HP traditional PS printer driver.
To gain access to the printer driver Properties, click Start on your Window task bar, click Settings, and then click
Printers. Right-click the printer name, and then click Properties.
The Device Settings tab in PS Properties communicates the hardware configuration of the printer to the driver. The
Device Settings tab appears whenever the driver is opened from the Printers folder by selecting and right-clicking the printer, and then clicking Properties…. for the driver. When the driver is opened from within a software program, the
Device Settings tab is not visible. When opened from the Printers folder, the Device Settings tab appears, as shown in the following illustration.
Figure 52: Device Settings tab
140
HP traditional PS driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
When you select features in the Device Settings tab that can be changed, a Change ... Setting dialog box opens in the bottom of the window.
Changes made to the Device Settings tab are not reflected in Document Properties until the modified device settings have been applied. For example, the duplexing unit will not appear until you modify the
Device Settings
tab, apply the settings, and then re-open Document Properties.
The Device Settings tab contains the following options.
•
Form to Tray Assignment
•
Font Substitution Table
•
Installable Options
Form to Tray Assignment
A network administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the paper size in each paper tray.
Many printers support more than one source of paper, such as upper and lower trays. You can assign a form (which defines the paper size and margins) to each of your printer paper sources. When a form is matched to a source, you can select the form when you print from your software programs. The printer prints from the tray to which that form is assigned.
The Form to Tray Assignment setting allows network administrators to specify, in the driver, the media size that is loaded into each available paper tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that are available in the media-size list on the Advanced tab in the Printing Preferences driver tabs. This constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the printer with paper-mount messages that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.
The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays, high-capacity input trays, configurable sized paper trays (XY trays), and envelope feeders. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate
Installable Options setting. For example, tray 3 on the HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer is a high-capacity (500sheet) tray that is listed in both the Form to Tray Assignment setting and the Installable Options setting. The input trays listed here are also listed as paper sources on the Paper/Quality tab.
Font Substitution Table
Clicking this option displays the font substitution table and options for changing the TrueType-to-printer font mapping.
PostScript Device Settings
The following controls are available and appear only in the PS driver.
Available PostScript Memory
This control specifies the amount of available PS memory and provides a spin box for changing this value. The available PS memory is a subset of the printer total physical memory. It is usually best to use the default setting, which is determined by your printer manufacturer. The default PS memory setting for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printers is 5859 KB.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PS driver features
141
142
Output Protocol
This control specifies the protocol the printer will use for print jobs. The following options are available:
•
ASCII (default)
•
TBCP
•
Binary
When you click ASCII, data is sent in ASCII format (7-bit), which may take longer to print but can be sent through any
I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port. When you click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications
Protocol), all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
Send Ctrl + D Before Each Job
This control specifies whether the printer will be reset at the beginning of every PS document. No is the default setting.
Ctrl + D resets the printer to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job.
Ctrl + D might cause a print job to fail if the printer is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a printer connected through parallel or serial ports, change No to Yes.
Send Ctrl + D After Each Job
This control specifies whether the printer will be reset at the end of every PS document. Yes is the default setting.
Ctrl + D resets the printer to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job.
Ctrl + D might cause a print job to fail if the printer is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change Yes to No.
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray
This control specifies whether to convert the true gray (RGB value) in text to the gray provided by the PS driver. The default setting is No.
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray
This control specifies whether to convert the true gray (RGB value) in graphics to the gray provided by the PS driver.
The default setting is No.
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts
This control specifies whether to augment the device fonts with the Euro character. The default setting is Yes.
Job Timeout
This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the printer before the printer stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the printer continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Wait Timeout
This control specifies how long the printer waits to get more PS information from the computer. After the specified time passes, the printer stops trying to print the document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you may want to increase this value. If you specify 0 seconds, the printer waits indefinitely.
The default setting is 300 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
HP traditional PS driver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the PS driver downloads TrueType fonts as outline
(Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type 3) font. This option lets you fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in Printing
Preferences. The default setting is 100 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of
32,767 pixels.
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the PS driver will download TrueType fonts as bitmap
(Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an outline (Type 1) font. This option lets you fine-tune the Automatic setting or override the Send TrueType as Bitmap setting for the TrueType Font
Download option on the Advanced tab in Printing Preferences. The default setting is 600 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Installable Options
This section allows you to configure the printer-specific printing options that you can install for the
HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printers. The following controls are available:
•
Tray 3
•
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
•
Printer Memory
Tray 3
This control specifies whether you have a high-capacity, 500-sheet Tray 3 installed on your printer. This tray is standard with the HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer. The default setting is Not Installed. In order to use Tray 3, you must change this setting to Installed.
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
If a duplexing unit is installed in the printer, select Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing): and then click Installed. The
HP Color LaserJet 3700dn and the HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer come with a duplex unit installed. The duplex unit is an optional accessory for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 and HP Color LaserJet 3700n printer. When the duplex unit is installed, the Print on Both Sides control appears in the Finishing tab, allowing you to turn on the duplex feature and select the type of binding for the print job, or to turn off the duplex feature.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP traditional PS driver features
143
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
When you install your printer using Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, the PCL 6 and PS unidrivers are installed.
This section describes the options available on each tab of the HP unidriver PCL 6 interface.
Access to drivers
To gain access to driver settings from within most software programs, click File, click Print, and then click Properties.
The appearance and names of the driver tabs that appear vary, depending on the printer model and the driver.
You can also control the drivers directly from your computer.
•
In Windows 2000, click Start, click Settings, click Printers, right-click the printer name, and then click Printing
Preferences or Document Defaults (depending on the OS and driver), to gain access to the same set of driver tabs that are controlled by the software program.
•
In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click Start, click Control Panel, click Printers and Faxes (Windows
XP Professional) or Printers and other hardware devices (Windows XP Home) to gain access to the same set of driver tabs that are controlled by the software program.
If, after right-clicking the printer name, you click Properties, you gain access to a different set of tabs that control the driver and driver connections.
Note
Help system
The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PS unidrivers include a full-featured Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options.
Bubble Help, which shows driver constraint messages with an "i" icon, is a feature of the the HP traditional PCL 6 drivers, and is not used by the HP traditional PS driver or the PCL 6 or PS unidrivers.
What's this? Help
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 support "What's this?" Help. You can gain access to "What's this?" Help messages in any of the following ways:
•
Press the Help button in the lower-right corner of the Paper/Quality, Finishing, Effects, Destination, or Color tabs for a general Help message that describes the use of the driver tabs.
•
Right-click a control and click What's this?, and a pop-up Help window appears.
•
Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an arrow with a question mark. Use this special cursor to select a control, and the pop-up Help window for that feature appears.
•
Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.
Context-sensitive Help
Press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, and a context-sensitive Help message appears.
144
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Incompatible Print Settings (constraint) messages
Incompatible print settings (constraint) messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific actions that you take. These messages alert you to the selections that are illogical or impossible given the capabilities of the printer or the current settings of other controls.
In Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating environments, some technically invalid printdriver configurations can be set without resulting in the appearance of warning messages. Duplexing, for instance, is not possible when the Transparency media type is selected. However, the incompatible print settings message does appear when you try to print with the incompatible settings.
For PCL 6, clicking the Resolve all conflicts for me automatically option button, and then clicking OK accepts the change that was just made, and the driver then resets the conflicting control to a setting that is compatible with the new value. If you want to keep the conflicting setting, click the I will resolve the conflict myself option button, and then click OK.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
145
Advanced tab features
You can use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages. Using this tab, you can select items such as paper size and copies in the driver (although most current software programs support these features in the print dialog box or through the software program page settings) or special controls that are not commonly used. The following illustration shows the Advanced tab.
Figure 53: The default appearance of the Advanced tab
146
The Advanced tab contains the following controls.
•
Paper/Output settings
•
Graphic settings
•
Document Options settings (containing Printer Features and Layout Options)
Paper/Output settings
The Paper/Output settings contain the following controls.
•
Copy Count setting
•
Copy Count setting
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Copy Count
This driver setting is useful for software programs that do not provide a copy count.
Collated
The Collated check box appears beside the Copy Count setting when the Copy Count setting is greater than 1.
This setting is not synchronized with the collate setting in the software program print dialog box. For instance, when using Microsoft Word, the Collate check box in the Print dialog box is selected by default, whereas, in the driver, the
Collated check box in the Advanced tab is not selected by default. The software program setting takes precedence over the driver setting, and the printed output is collated by default. To obtain uncollated printed output, the
Collate
setting must not be selected in the driver and in the software program. Similarly, the
Collated check box might be selected in the driver, but if the Collate setting is not enabled in the software program, the printed output is uncollated.
Graphic settings
The Graphic settings contain the following options.
•
Image Color Management group box
•
TrueType Font group box (PS only)
Image Color Management
This option lists the available Image Color Management (ICM) options used for printing color graphics. ICM, a set of calculations for color matching, makes it possible for software programs to adjust colors before printing so that the color of images displayed on the screen more closely match the color of images when printed.
The Image Color Management settings contain the following controls.
•
ICM Method settings
•
ICM Intent settings
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
147
148
ICM Method
The ICM Method setting specifies how to print your color graphics. The following options are available.
•
Disabled is the default setting.
•
ICM Handled by Host Systemcauses the calculations for color matching to be performed on the host computer before it sends the document to the printer.
•
ICM Handled by Printer calculates the color matching on your printer. In this case, a set of rules for mapping the colors is created and downloaded to the printer (which must be PostScript level 2 emulation or higher). The printer uses these rules to adjust colors in the document.
•
ICM Handled by Printer using printer calibration (available on the PS driver only) calculates the color matching on your printer. In this case, the set of rules for mapping the colors is already downloaded to the printer (which must be PostScript level 2 emulation or higher), so it is not created or downloaded again.
ICM Intent
This control specifies how color images are created to produce the best looking image on the printed page.
The following options are available.
•
Graphics is the best setting to use if you are printing a chart or using fully saturated, bright colors.
•
Pictures is the default setting. Use this setting to maximize the contrast for photographs or pictures where the colors blend together.
•
Proof is the setting to use if your document uses a color that you need to match exactly, and you are sending the document to a printer that has that specific color of ink.
•
Match allows you to preview the color settings from another printer.
TrueType Font (PS only)
This control specifies the TrueType font options for the PS unidriver. The following options are available.
•
Substitute with Device Font, which is the default setting, causes the printer to use equivalent printer fonts for printing documents that contain TrueType fonts. This permits faster printing; however, you might lose special characters not supported by the printer font.
•
Download as Softfont downloads TrueType fonts for printing instead of using printer fonts.
Document Options
The Document Options settings contain the following controls.
•
Advanced Printing Features
•
Color Printing Mode (PCL 6
•
Print Optimizations (PCL 6
•
PostScript Options (PS only)
•
Printer Features
•
Layout Options
Advanced Printing Features
When the Advanced Printing Features setting is Enabled, metafile spooling is turned on and Finishing-tab options such as Page Order, Booklet Layout, and Pages per Sheet are available, depending on your printer. For normal printing, leave the Advanced Printing Features setting at the default (Enabled). If compatibility problems occur, you can disable the feature. When disabled, metafile spooling is turned off and the printing options might be unavailable.
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Color Printing Mode (PCL 6 only)
The Color Printing Mode specifies whether to print in color or black and white. The color option is True Color (24
bpp), which is the default setting. Use the black and white option, Monochrome, to sharpen details in graphics or to speed up the printing of your color document.
Print Optimizations
The default setting for Print Optimizations is Enabled. When this feature is enabled and your document contains overlapping text and graphics, text placed on top of a graphic might not print correctly. If the printed output is not correct, you can disable this feature. When disabled, print optimization features, such as substituting device fonts for
TrueType fonts and scanning for horizontal and vertical rules, are turned off.
PostScript Options (PS only)
The following PostScript Options are available.
•
PostScript Output Option
•
TrueType Font Download Option
•
PostScript Language Level
•
Send PostScript Error Handler
•
Mirrored Output
PostScript Output Option
The PostScript Output Option specifies the output format for PS files. Generally, you use the default setting,
Optimize for Speed, to print your documents. To create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document Structuring
Conventions (ADSC), click Optimize for Portability. Each page of the document will be a self-contained object. This is useful if you want to create a PS file and print it on a different printer. If you want to include the file as an image in another document that that is printed from a different software program, click Encapsulated PostScript (EPS).
Archive Format creates a PS file you can use later.
TrueType Font Download Option
The TrueType Font Download Option specifies how TrueType fonts are downloaded. Automatic, which is the default setting, allows the PS driver to decide which format is best. If you want to download the TrueType font as a scalable outline font, click Outline. To download the TrueType font as a bitmap font, click Bitmap. If your printer is a
TrueType rasterizer printer, click Native TrueType to download the TrueType font as an outline font.
PostScript Language Level
The PostScript Language Level option specifies which PS language level to use, from 1 to 3, the highest level supported by your printer. The default setting is 3. Some printers support multiple levels.
It is usually best to select the highest number available, because a higher language level provides more features. In some instances, you should use level 1. For example, if you are printing a file to disk, and that file will be printed by someone with a level 1 printer, you need to select level 1.
Send PostScript Error Handler
The Send PostScript Error Handler setting specifies whether a PS error handler message is sent. If you want the printer to print an error page when an error occurs in the print job, click
Yes. Yes is the default setting.
Mirrored Output
This control specifies mirrored output. Click Yes to print a mirror image of your document by reversing the horizontal coordinates. No is the default setting.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
149
Printer Features
The following Printer Features are available.
•
Print All Text as Black
•
Send True Type as Bitmap (PCL 6 only)
•
Graphics Mode
•
Print on Backside
Print All Text as Black
The Print All Text as Black feature is Disabled by default. When Enabled, this option causes the driver to print all text as black regardless of the original document text color. By design, white text remains white as a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background. This setting does not affect graphic images on the page.
Print all
Text as Black remains enabled only for the current print job. When the current print job is completed, Print all Text
as Black is automatically disabled.
Send TrueType as Bitmap (PCL 6 only)
Send TrueType as Bitmap: provides an alternative for those software programs that have trouble dealing with
TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The setting is Disabled (off) by default. The TrueType fonts are first converted to bitmap soft fonts prior to downloading. The Enabled setting causes the driver to send TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outline) of the fonts.
Graphics Mode
Two settings under Graphics Mode control the way in which the driver expresses vector graphics on a page:
•
Select Send Graphics as Vector to send graphics to the printer as a combination of HP-GL/2 and raster images.
This setting might produce higher-quality graphics output.
•
Select Send Graphics as Raster to send all graphics to the printer as images composed of individual dots. This setting might improve printing speed.
Print on Backside
The default setting for Print on Backside is Off. Select On when you are printing on the second side of the paper.
This reduces the paper curl that can occur when paper is printed on twice.
Layout Options
The following Layout Options are available.
•
Orientation
•
Page Order
Note
Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page. It does not affect in any way the manner in which the media is fed into the printer. The default orientation is Portrait. The other setting is Landscape.
Nearly all software programs establish the orientation for the printed page, so the page orientation in the driver is useful only for the few software programs that do not set an orientation.
150
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Page Order
Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of your document are printed. Front to Back prints the document so that page 1 prints first. Back to Front prints the document so that page 1 prints last. The Back to Front setting is useful if you are printing to a face-up output bin to achieve output in the correct order.
The page-ordering operation works on whole sheets of paper rather than on individual logical pages. Accordingly, if you set N-up to be greater than one, the ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet of paper does not change.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
151
Paper/Quality tab features
Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media, as well as to define a custom paper size.
If you want to, you can use this tab to indicate different paper-selection choices for the first page and back cover of the document. The following illustration shows the Paper/Quality tab.
Figure 54: Paper/Quality tab
The Paper/Quality tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets group box
•
Document preview image
•
Paper Options group box
152
Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper-left portion of the Paper/Quality tab view is Print Task Quick Sets. Any change to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the Paper/Quality tab affects the group box on the Finishing tab, the Effectsand the Color tab, as they are the same control.
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
The Print Task Quick Sets control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all other Document Defaults or Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as paper size and pages per sheet.
Print Task Quick Sets is a setting that is available on all of the tabs except the Advanced tab. It stores the current combination of driver settings that is found on all of the other tabs. Print Task Quick Sets are either preset or userdefined printing specifications (such as paper size, pages per sheet, and so on).
The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on four of the five of the Document Defaults or Printing Preferences driver tabs (the Paper/Quality, Finishing, Effects, and Color tabs). The Print Task Quick Sets control does not appear on the Advanced tab, nor on the driver Properties tabs.
The Print Task Quick Sets control is used to store the current combination of driver settings that are found on all other Document Defaults or Printing Preferences driver tabs.
The following settings are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu.
•
Default Print Settings
•
User Guide Print Settings
An illustration of the available Print Task Quick Sets appears below.
Figure 55: Print Task Quick Sets
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
153
Default Print Settings
When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that are associated with watermark definitions, custom paper sizes, or the User Guide Print Settings quick set have been changed or deleted, the original settings are not restored.
Type a new Quick Set name here appears in the Print Task Quick Sets menu automatically if no other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed, or if all of the driver settings match the original settings.
Otherwise, the setting in the Print Task Quick Sets menu is the same label that appeared when you last closed the printing Properties dialog box by clicking OK.
The following table shows the default settings for Print Task Quick Sets. See the "HP Driver Preconfiguration" section of this document for information about preconfigurable driver settings.
Table 16: Print Task Quick Set default values for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer
Driver feature
Print on both sides
Flip pages up
Booklet printing
Pages per sheet
Print page border
Page order
Print quality
Current setting
Scale patterns
(WYSIWYG)
Print text as black
TrueType as bitmaps
Print document on
Size to print on
Off
Off
Off
1
U.S. English Print Task
Quick Sets default values
Off
Right, then down
Best quality
PCL 6: This is the "Faster
Printing" setting
On
Off
Off - send TrueType fonts as outlines
Off - print on the size specified in the Paper tab
Letter
Other language default setting (if different)
On (in Thai only)
Default value depends on regional paper size
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Preconfigurable
Yes
Yes (except in Thai)
Scale to fit
% of normal size
Watermarks
Watermarks first page only
Current watermarks
Watermark message
Off
100
(none)
Off
(none), Confidential,
Draft, SAMPLE
(none)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
2
Watermark message angle
Watermark message custom angle
Watermark font name
Diagonal
52
Arial (R) Language dependent
Yes
Yes
2
Watermark font color Gray
Watermark font shading Very Light
Watermark font size
Watermark font style
Mini pages tab
140
Regular
All pages
Yes
Yes
Yes
2
Yes
2
2
Yes
No
2
1
154
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Driver feature
Use different paper for first page
All pages and first page size is:
All pages and first page source is:
All pages and first page type is:
U.S. English Print Task
Quick Sets default values
Off - all of the pages use the same paper
Letter
Auto Select
Unspecified
Other pages source is:
Other pages type is:
Back cover
Back cover source is:
Auto Select
Unspecified
No back cover
Auto Select
Back cover type is: Unspecified
Custom paper size width 8.50 inches
Custom paper size height 11.0 inches
Paper size units
Copies
Orientation
Rotate by 180 degrees
Inches
1
Portrait
Off
Other language default setting (if different)
Default value depends on regional paper size
210 mm
297 mm
Millimeters
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Preconfigurable
1- Preconfigurable by using an HP Preconfiguration tool. For more information, go to:
http://www.hp.com/support/clj3700
2- Not supported in Windows 98 and Windows Me
1
User Guide Print Settings
The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Set for optimal printing of the User Reference
Guide for the HP Color LaserJet 3700.
Type new Quick Set name here
By default, the Print Task Quick Set menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you change any of the default settings on any of the Document Defaults driver tabs and you want to save the configuration as a Print Task
Quick Set, highlight the word Type new Quick Set name here, type the name you want for your new Print Task
Quick Set, and click Save. Print Task Quick Sets are saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick
Set, select it from the drop-down menu and click Delete.
You can store a maximum of 25 user-defined Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save too many, a message box appears that reads, "There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined. Please delete some before adding new ones."
Document preview image
The document preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of these Document Defaults or Printing Preferences driver tabs (the Paper/
Quality,Finishing, Effects, and Color tabs).
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the preview image. When you move the mouse over the preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking on the image. The pale-yellow dimensions label that appears below the preview image reflects the selected page size. The horizontal dimension is always first, so the order of the numbers reverses when the orientation changes. Click on the label to toggle between English and metric units.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
155
Paper Options group box
The settings specified in that group box apply to all of the pages of the document. The following illustration shows the
Paper Options group box and the First Page, Other Pages, and Back Cover selections.
Figure 56: Paper Options group box
When you click the Use different paper check box, the First Page, Other Pages, and Back Cover options become selectable. Each of the selections contain different options, as noted in the following sections.
156
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
First Page options
The Paper Options group box allows three sets of choices when you select the Use different paper check box: First
Page, Other Pages, and Back Cover. The First Page options are shown in the following illustration.
Figure 57: First Page options
The First Page options are as follows:
•
Use different paper check box
•
Size is: drop-down menu
•
Source is: drop-down menu
•
Type is: drop-down menu
Use different paper check box
To select different media for the first page of a print job, follow these steps:
1. Click File, click Print, and then click Properties. The Document Propertiesdialog box appears.
2. Click the Paper/Quality tab, and then select the Use different paper check box.
3. Click the First Page selection. In the Size is:, Source is:, and Type is: drop-down menus, select the size, source, and type settings for your cover.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
157
Size is: drop-down menu
This feature actually functions as two controls: a drop-down menu that contains all of the the supported media sizes
(including any user-defined custom sizes) and a text label that indicates the dimensions of the selected size.
Moving the pointer over the text label causes the arrow to change to a gloved hand, indicating that the area beneath the pointer is selectable. Clicking here toggles the units of measure between inches and millimeters, offering the same options on the dimensions label in the preview image. Selecting a new size from the drop-down menu updates the media-dimensions text label as well as the preview image.
You can specify size only for the first page or for all of the pages. On the Other Pages and Back Cover group boxes, the Size is drop-down menu does not appear because the media size must be consistent for all of the pages of the job. Certain software programs can override this command and specify different media sizes within a single document.
Any change in the media size selection causes the Booklet Printing feature to be turned off.
Source is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the paper source to use for printing a document. Different printer models support different paper sources. The list of paper sources depends on the printer model and its accessories. Any optional paper trays that are installed through the Configure tab are also shown here.
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options:
•
Automatically Select
•
Printer Auto Select
•
Manual Feed in Tray 1
•
Tray 1 (500-sheet tray)
•
Tray 2 (500-sheet tray)
The default setting is
Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the printer uses the paper tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a paper source other than Automatically Select, make sure that the correct paper size is loaded in the paper source.
If a conflict exists among paper source, size, and type, and you choose to keep the conflicting settings, the settings are processed in the following order: paper size, paper type, and then paper source.
For information about media sizes and types, see the “Media attributes” section of this guide.
158
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Type Is drop-down menu
The Type Is drop-down menu shows all of the the paper types that the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer supports, as well as any user-defined types that have been created by a network administrator. The default setting is
Unspecified, which allows the software program to select the paper type.
You cannot manually add custom paper types through the driver. Custom sizes can be added only if you use the bidirectional communication mechanism, so the sizes must already exist in the printer when the bidirectional query occurs. If bidirectional communication is enabled, then the information returned is an updated list of paper types. If bidirectional communication is not enabled, then the driver looks for custom paper types saved from a previous bidirectional communication query, and uses those. Otherwise, no custom paper types are available through the driver.
The following standard types appear in the lists:
•
Bond
•
Cardstock (> 164 g/m
2
)
•
Color
•
Glossy (75 - 105 g/m
2
)
•
Envelope
•
Heavy (106 - 163 g/m
2
)
•
Heavy Glossy
•
Labels
•
Letterhead
•
Light (< 75 g/m
2
)
•
Plain
•
Preprinted
•
Prepunched
•
Recycled
•
Tough Paper
•
Transparency
•
Unspecified
For more information about media types and sizes, see the "Media attributes" section of this guide.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
159
Other Pages options
Use the group Other Pages options to select an alternative media type or source for the pages that follow the first page of a document. The following illustration shows the Other Pages options.
options
The Other Pages options are as follows.
•
Source is: drop-down menu
•
Type is: drop-down menu
Source is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the paper source to use for printing a document. Different printer models support different paper sources. The list of paper sources depends on the printer model and its accessories. Any optional paper trays that are installed through the Configure tab are also shown here. For more information about the Source
Is: setting, see the "First Page options" section of this guide.
Type is: drop-down menu
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the the media types supported by the printer, as well as any user-defined types that have been created by a network administrator using Web JetAdmin. When you use the default setting,
Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, usually Plain.
Using the First Page and Other Pages options
A cover can have two forms, depending on the type of booklet you are printing:
• For a full-size book (for example, Letter size, Letter type), select a different media for the first page and add an extra blank back page. The front cover can contain print or be a blank page, and can either be pulled from a different paper source or be of another media type. The back cover can be printed on a different media from the front cover.
•
For two-page-per-sheet (2-up) booklet printing, you can obtain a cover by selecting a different media for the first page only. The back cover setting is hidden, because this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
Whenever you make changes to all of the pages (that is, when Use different paper for first page is not selected), these changes are reflected in both the First Page and Other Pages settings whenever you set “Use different paper”.
160
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Back Cover options
The Back Cover options allow you to include a blank back cover on a document, or to include a back cover from a paper source different from that used for the remainder of the document. Use the Back Cover options to select an alternative media source (or the same source as First Page) from which a blank page is drawn and placed after the final page of the body of the document. The following illustration shows the Back Cover options.
Figure 58: Back Cover options
The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Layout is enabled on the Finishing tab.
The group box contains one option button.
•
Add a blank back cover option button
Add a blank cover option check box
Clicking the Add a blank back cover check box activates two drop-down menus. The drop-down menu values default to the same source as that chosen for the First Page options.
•
Source is: drop-down menu (default)
•
Type is: drop-down menu
Source is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the paper source to use for printing a document. Different printer models support different paper sources. The list of paper sources depends on the printer model and its accessories. Any optional paper trays that are installed through the Configure tab are also shown here. For more information about the Source
Is: setting, see the "First Page group box" section of this guide.
Type is: drop-down menu
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the the media types supported by the printer, as well as any user-defined types that have been created by a network administrator using Web JetAdmin. When you use the default setting,
Unspecified, the printer uses the default media type, usually Plain.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
161
Finishing tab features
Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the paper output. The following illustration shows the Finishing tab.
Figure 59: Finishing tab
162
The Finishing tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets group box
•
Document Options group box
•
Document preview image
•
Rotate check box
Print Task Quick Sets group box
The document preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of these Document Defaults or Printing Preferences driver tabs (the Paper/
Quality,Finishing, Effects, and Color tabs). For more information about the document preview image, see the
"Paper-Quality tab features" section of this document.
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Document Options group box
The Document Options group box contains the following controls.
•
Correct order for rear bin check box
•
Print on Both Sides (manually) check box
•
Flip Pages Up option
•
Booklet Layout drop-down menu
•
Pages Per Sheet spin box
•
Print Page Borders check box
•
Page Order drop-down menu
Note
Print on Both Sides check box
The Print on Both Sides check box is available only if the printer has a duplexing unit installed. The
HP Color LaserJet 3700dn and the HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer come with a duplex unit installed. The duplex unit is an optional accessory for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 and HP Color LaserJet 3700n printer.
In addition to having a duplexing unit installed, the duplexing unit must be correctly configured in the printer driver in order to use the Print on Both Sides option. To configure the duplexing unit, click Start on the Windows task bar, click Settings, and then click Printers. Right-click on the printer name, and then click Properties. Click the
Configure tab, and click the duplexing unit check box to select it. Then click Apply, and close the driver window.
If a duplexing unit is installed in the printer, select Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing): and then click Installed.
When the duplex unit is installed, the Print on Both Sides control appears in the Finishing tab, allowing you to turn on the duplex feature and select the type of binding for the print job, or to turn off the duplex feature.
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides option is off (not selected). Print on Both Sides is available when the following conditions exist:
•
Type is on the Paper tab is set to any type except for Envelope, Labels, or Transparency.
•
Size is is Letter, Legal, A3, A4, A5, B4 (Japanese Industry Standard, or JIS), B5 (JIS), Executive, Executive (JIS),
8.5x13 (Custom), 12x18 (Custom), 8K, 16K, or custom sizes greater than or equal to 98 mm by 191 mm (3.86
inches x 7.5 inches) and less than or equal to 306 mm by 469 mm (12.0 inches x 18.5 inches).
When Paper Size is set to Letter, Legal, A4, or B4 (JIS), clicking Print on Both Sides makes the Flip Pages Up and
Booklet Printing options available.
Automatically printing on both sides
Use the duplexing unit in the printer to automatically print on two sides of the paper when that option is specified in the job. The HP Color LaserJet 3700dn and the HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer come with a duplex unit installed. The duplex unit is an optional accessory for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 and HP Color LaserJet 3700n printer.
To achieve the best print quality when printing on the second side of the page, the printer needs to make adjustments to its print modes. When you select a media type, you are, in effect, instructing the printer to use a group of printer settings (such as fuser temperature and print speed) to print the media with the best possible quality. This group of settings is known as a mode or print mode, and there is an optimal print mode for each media type. Print-mode adjustments are automatic when the duplexing unit is used.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
163
Flip Pages Up
The Flip Pages Up check box, enabled only when Print on Both Sides is selected, is used to specify the duplexbinding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not selected. The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this box, depending on the paper orientation selected on the Basics tab.
Table 17: Page orientation
Orientation (Basics tab)
Portrait
Landscape
Flip Pages Up selected
Short-edge binding
Long-edge binding
Flip Pages Up not selected
Long-edge binding
Short-edge binding
When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.
Booklet layout
The Booklet Layout drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides is selected, offers choices that are based on the current paper size. The default setting for the Booklet Printing drop-down menu is Off. The other settings have the following format, where [paper size] depends on the paper size set on the Paper tab.
•
[paper size] (Left Binding)
•
[paper size] (Right Binding)
When you select [paper size] (Left Binding) or [paper size] (Right Binding), the document preview image changes to show the location of the binding, and, if the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1, it automatically changes to 2. You may change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to 4, 6, 9, or 16. See "Pages per Sheet" in the
"HP traditional PCL 6 driver features" section of this document for more information.
Booklet printing is enabled only when Letter, Legal, 11x17, or B4 (JIS) is selected as the paper size. Booklet printing is disabled when other paper sizes are selected, including envelopes and postcards of any size.
The Booklet Printing drop-down menu appears only when:
•
Print on Both Sides is selected.
•
% of Normal Size (on the Effects tab) is 100.
•
Pages per Sheet is 1.
•
Print Document On <media type> (on the Effects tab) is not selected.
If any of these conditions is not met (except the first), a Bubble Help appears next to Booklet Printing to tell you why it is disabled.
Book and booklet printing
Book and booklet printing are both supported by the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer.
A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages that can have a different media type for the first page (front cover) or last page (back cover). Use the First Page and Back Cover minitabs on the Paper tab (available when you select the Use different paper for first page check box) to select different media for the first and last pages.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media type. Use the Booklet Printing drop-down menu on the Finishing tab to control booklet settings.
164
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Printing a Booklet
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet and that can be folded into a booklet that is half the size of the media type. Follow the instructions below for printing a booklet.
The following instructions apply only to the HP traditional PCL 6 drivers. The HP traditional PS driver supports booklet printing through Windows programs that provide booklet-printing configuration settings.
Note
1. Click File, click Print, and then click Properties.
2. Click the Finishing tab. On the drop-down menu, select Print on Both Sides.
3. In the Booklet Printing drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want. The booklet printing type consists of the media size and the location of the binding (for example, Letter [Left binding]).
Printing a book
A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages that can have a different media type for the first page (front cover) or last page (back cover). The book cover must be the same size as the inside sheets. Follow these instructions for book printing.
1. Click File, click Print, and then click Properties.
2. Click the Paper tab, and then select the Use different paper for first page check box.
3. Click the First Page tab. On the Size is, Source is, and Type is menus, select the size, source, and type settings for your cover.
4. Click the Other Pages tab. On the Size is and Source is menus, select the size and source settings for the inside sheets of your print job.
5. Click the Back Cover tab. The back cover, if there is one, must be the same size as the booklet cover and the inside sheets. The No back cover is the default setting. If your print job has a back cover that uses the same source and type settings you selected in the First Page tab, select Use the first page source. If not, select Use
an alternate source, and then select the back-cover settings in the Source is and Type is menus.
Whenever you make changes to all of the pages (that is, when Use different paper is cleared), these changes are reflected in both the First Page and Other Pages settings whenever you set Use different paper.
The Back Cover tab is not available when you select any Booklet Printing setting except Off (which is the default). When you use this feature, the last page of the print job is folded into the middle of the booklet.
Pages per Sheet
The Pages per Sheet drop-down menu provides six settings: 1 (default), 2, 4, 6, 9, and 16. If you type another value into the box (for example, 3), the control rounds that value to the nearest valid value (in this example, 4).
Print Page Borders
Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page Order, which become active when Pages Per Sheet is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the borders of each logical page.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
165
Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:
•
Right, then Down
•
Down, then Right
•
Left, then Down
•
Down, then Left
The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples in the following illustration.
Figure 60: Page-order preview images
•
2 pages per sheet
•
4 pages per sheet
•
6 pages per sheet
•
9 pages per sheet
•
16 pages per sheet
Print Quality
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer driver
Print Quality group box provides options that control resolution, graphics settings, and font settings.
The default setting for Print Quality is Default. To change the default print quality settings, click the Details button.
Clicking the Details button opens the Print Quality Details dialog box. The Print Quality Details dialog box has different options depending on the driver you are using.
166
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Print Quality Details for the PCL 6 driver
The Print Quality Details dialog box provides the options for print-quality settings in the PCL 6 driver as shown in the following illustration.
Figure 61: Print Quality Details dialog box for HP traditional PCL 6 driver
The following options are available.
•
Current Settings group box
•
Graphics Settings group box
•
Output Settings group box
•
Font Settings group box
Current Settings group box
The Current Settings group box has three states in the HP traditional PCL 6 driver:
•
This is the "Faster Printing" setting
•
This is the "Best Quality" setting
•
This is a "Custom" setting
This is the "Best Quality" setting appears if you select Best Quality in the Print Quality group box on the Finishing tab.
This is the "Faster Printing" setting, the default setting, appears if you select Faster Printing in the Print Quality group box on the Finishing tab.
This is a "Custom" setting appears if you select Custom in the Print Quality group box on the Finishing tab.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
167
168
Graphics Settings group box
The Graphics Settings group box in the HP traditional PCL 6 driver has settings under Raster Compression for compressing graphics. The following options are available in the Raster Compression: drop-down menu:
•
Automatic. This is the default setting. When this option is selected, the printer driver determines the best compression method to use.
•
Best Quality. This setting forces the driver to use a compression method that results in no loss of data during compression.
•
Maximum Compression. Where applicable, this setting requires the printer driver to use a compression method that maximizes compression. This setting can result in a loss of quality in the printed output.
Output Settings
The Output Settings group box contains controls for selecting resolution and other print-job settings, including pattern scaling and printing all text as black.
For the HP LaserJet 6 driver, the Default values for output settings are as follows:
•
Resolution is
600 dpi
•
Raster Compression is set to Automatic
•
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) is selected
•
Print all Text as Black is not selected
•
Send TrueType as Bitmaps is not selected
Resolution
There is a single Resolution: setting for the HP traditional PCL 6 driver, 600 dpi. "Resolution" refers to the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to print the page.
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG)
Use the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) feature to address the moiré effect created when certain programs encounter certain patterns. Use this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed result might look better. The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This option is on by default.
Print all Text as Black
The Print all Text as Black feature is off by default. When selected, this option causes the driver to print all text as black regardless of the original document text color. By design, white text remains white as a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a dark background. This setting does not affect graphic images on the page.
Print all
Text as Black remains selected only for the current print job. When the current print job is completed, Print all Text
as Black is automatically turned off.
Font Settings group box
In the
Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which provides an alternative for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType (TM) fonts for special graphic purposes, such as shading, rotation, or slanting. The Send TrueType as Bitmaps check box is not selected by default. If you select this option, the driver sends TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines, which retains the standard format (outlines) of the fonts.
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Effects tab features
Use the Effects tab to create unique paper effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following illustration shows the Effects tab.
Figure 62: Effects tab
The Effects tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets group box
•
Resizing options group box
• Document preview image
•
Watermarks group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The document preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of these Document Defaults or Printing Preferences driver tabs (the Paper/
Quality,Finishing, Effects, and Color tabs). For more information about the document preview image, see the "Paper/
Quality tab features" section of this document.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
169
Resizing options group box
The Resizing options group box consists of the following controls.
•
Print Document On setting
•
Scale to Fit option
•
% of Normal Size setting
Print Document On setting
Select the Print Document On check box to format the document for one paper size and then print the document on a different paper size, with or without scaling the image to fit the new paper size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
•
The % of Normal Size value is not 100.
•
The Pages per Sheet value (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.
When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can print. The list contains all of the the standard media sizes that are supported by the selected media source and any custom sizes that you have created (if the currently selected media source is manual, auto, or any tray). When
Print Document On
is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically selected.
Scale to Fit option
The Scale to Fit options box specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target paper size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on the target paper. If the document size is larger than the target paper size, then the document image is clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the target paper. The following illustration shows preview images for a document formatted for legal-size paper with the Print Document On check box selected, and the target size specified as Letter.
Figure 63: Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
170
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size, the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the target page size.
% of Normal Size option
The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting in the entry box is 100 percent of normal size. Normal size is defined as the paper size that is selected within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does not negotiate the paper size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and sends it to the printer.
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
The limits of the range are from 25 percent to 400 percent, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upper-left corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator is dragged, and the preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the scroll bar arrows increases or decreases the scale by one percent. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10 percent.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator at the default Windows resolution; use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the desired value, and then use the scroll bar arrows to refine the value.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
•
Print Document On is selected
•
Pages per Sheet is not 1
Watermarks group box
Use the Watermarks feature to choose a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or edit an existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
• (none)
• Confidential
• Draft
• SAMPLE
The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system, plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any watermark selected from this list appears in the preview image.
When First Page Only is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The First Page
Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is "(none)".
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
171
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears.
Figure 64: Watermark details
The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and controlling the message angle and font attributes.
Click OK to accept all of the changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box. However, clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark, and then select a different watermark or click
New, all of the changes made to the previous watermark are saved, and only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.
172
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Current watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined watermarks made available in the driver and any new watermarks you have created.
To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the
Watermark Message edit box as "Untitled" until you name it. The name that you type in the Watermark Message field appears in the Current Watermarks group box in the Watermark Details dialog box and in the Watermarks group box on the Effects tab.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box. To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. A warning appears asking whether you are sure you want to delete the selected item. Click Cancel if you want to keep the watermark. Click OK to delete the selected watermark.
You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time. When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled, and a Bubble Help message appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to enable it.
To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the Watermark
Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each with a different font or size. When this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2). When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the number increases until the name is unique.
Message angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations in relation to the page's text. The settings are Diagonal, Horizontal, or Angle (custom). The default is Diagonal. All three settings automatically center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement. Diagonal places the text along a line that spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.
Horizontal places the text along a line that spans the mid-left and mid-right edges of the page. Angle places the text at the specified angle across the page.
Font attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the color, shading, size, and style of the font.
Name
The Name drop-down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is languagedependent.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
173
Color
The Color drop-down menu lists the fixed, unalterable color choices for the watermark. The color options are:
• Gray
• Red
• Yellow
• Green
• Cyan
• Blue
• Magenta
Shading
The following range of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:
•
Lightest
•
Very Light (default)
•
Light
•
Medium Light
•
Medium
•
Medium Dark
•
Dark
•
Very Dark
•
Darkest
These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used for the Color attribute. A choice of Light plus Gray (from the Color attribute) produces a lightly saturated gray watermark. A choice of Lightest plus Gray produces the lightest shade of watermark; Darkest plus Gray produces a black watermark.
Size
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is language-dependent. The choice of Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic is available from the Style drop-down menu.
Default settings
The default settings for new watermarks are Arial font, Gray color, Very Light shading, 80 points, and Regular style.
The default settings for preset watermarks are Arial font, Gray color, Very Light shading, and Bold style. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent, and varies.
174
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Color tab features
Use the Color tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments and halftone settings.
Color output can also be converted to grayscale. The Color tab is shown in the following illustration.
Figure 65: Color tab
The Color tab contains the following controls.
•
Print Task Quick Sets group box
• Document preview image
•
Color Options group box
Print Task Quick Sets
The document preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of these Document Defaults or Printing Preferences driver tabs (the Paper/
Quality,Finishing, Effects, and Color tabs). For more information about the document preview image, see the "Paper/
Quality tab features" section of this document.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
175
Document preview image
The document preview image is a color, line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The preview image appears in the upper-right corner of all of the Document Defaults or Printing Preferences driver tabs (the
Finishing, Effects, Paper, Destination, Basics, and Color tabs). For more information about the document preview image, see the "Finishing tab features" section of this document.
Color Options group box
Use the Color Options group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the print job color rendering and print quality.
To use default coloration settings, click the Automatic option button. To change the default coloration settings, click the Manual option button, and then click the Settings button. To convert color information to grayscale and print the document in black and white, select the Print in Grayscale checkbox.
Color Options settings
When you click the Settings . . . option button, the Color Settings dialog box appears. The default settings are shown in the following illustration. To change the settings, make your selections using the drop-down menus in the
Color
Settings dialog box, and then click OK. You are then prompted to save your selections as Custom or Manual settings.
Figure 66: Color Settings Options dialog box
176
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Text
In the Text options, the Neutral Grays drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is embedded in the printer firmware. The options are Black Only or 4-Color. You can adjust the Neutral Grays setting independently for text, graphics, or photographs.
•
Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and blacks) using only black toner, which ensures that neutral colors do not have a color cast.
•
4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black.
In the Text options, the Halftone drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded in the printer firmware. The Halftone options, Detail and Smooth, affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You can independently adjust halftone settings for text, graphics, and photos.
•
Detail. This option is optimized for the best reproduction of normal to small text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors. Choose this option when the sharp edges of small objects, especially those that contain secondary colors (such as red, green, and blue), are the top priority.
•
Smooth. This option is optimized for the best reproduction of images, graphics, and large, solid-filled print ares. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option when the color fidelity of large objects is the top priority.
In the Text options, the RGB Color drop-down menu controls the color treatment for object types and determines how colors are rendered. The options are Default (sRGB), Device, and Vivid.
•
Default (sRGB). This option interprets RGB color as standard default RGB color space (sRGB), which is the accepted standard for many software companies and organizations such as Microsoft and the Worldwide Web
Consortium.
•
Device. This option sets the printer to print RGB data in the raw device mode. To render photographs properly when this option is selected, you must manage color in the software program in which you are working or in the operating system.
•
Vivid. This option sets the printer to increase the color saturation in the midtones. Less colorful objects are rendered more colorfully. This value is recommended for printing business graphics.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
177
178
Graphics
In the Graphics options, the Neutral Grays drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is embedded in the printer firmware. The options are Black Only or 4-Color. You can adjust the Neutral Grays setting independently for text, graphics, or photographs.
•
Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and blacks) using only black toner, which ensures that neutral colors do not have a color cast.
•
4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black.
In the Graphics options. the Halftone drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded in the printer firmware. The Halftone options, Text and Detail, affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You can independently adjust halftone settings for text, graphics, and photos.
•
Detail. This option is optimized for the best reproduction of normal to small text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors. Choose this option when the sharp edges of small objects, especially those that contain secondary colors (such as red, green, and blue), are the top priority.
•
Smooth. This option is optimized for the best reproduction of images, graphics, and large, solid-filled print ares. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option when the color fidelity of large objects is the top priority.
In the Graphics options, the RGB Color drop-down menu controls the color treatment for object types and determines how colors are rendered. The options are Default (sRGB), Device, and Vivid.
•
Default (sRGB). This option interprets RGB color as standard default RGB color space (sRGB), which is the accepted standard for many software companies and organizations such as Microsoft and the Worldwide Web
Consortium.
•
Device. This option sets the printer to print RGB data in the raw device mode. To render photographs properly when this option is selected, you must manage color in the software program in which you are working or in the operating system.
•
Vivid. This option sets the printer to increase the color saturation in the midtones. Less colorful objects are rendered more colorfully. This value is recommended for printing business graphics.
Photographs
In the Photographs options, the Neutral Grays drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is embedded in the printer firmware. The options are Black Only or 4-Color. You can adjust the Neutral
Grays setting independently for text, graphics, or photographs.
•
Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and blacks) using only black toner, which ensures that neutral colors do not have a color cast.
•
4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black.
In the Photographs options, the Halftone drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded in the printer firmware. The Halftone options, Smooth and Detail, affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You can independently adjust halftone settings for text, graphics, and photos.
•
Detail. This option is optimized for the best reproduction of normal to small text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors. Choose this option when the sharp edges of small objects, especially those that contain secondary colors (such as red, green, and blue), are the top priority.
•
Smooth. This option is optimized for the best reproduction of images, graphics, and large, solid-filled print ares. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option when the color fidelity of large objects is the top priority.
In the Photographs options, the RGB Color drop-down menu controls the color treatment for object types and determines how colors are rendered. The options are Default (sRGB), Device, and Vivid.
HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
•
Default (sRGB). This option interprets RGB color as standard default RGB color space (sRGB), which is the accepted standard for many software companies and organizations such as Microsoft and the Worldwide Web
Consortium.
•
Device. This option sets the printer to print RGB data in the raw device mode. To render photographs properly when this option is selected, you must manage color in the software program in which you are working or in the operating system.
•
Vivid. This option sets the printer to increase the color saturation in the midtones. Less colorful objects are rendered more colorfully. This value is recommended for printing business graphics.
If your software program converts text and graphics to raster, the Photographs settings also control the Text and
Graphics settings.
General
The General Color Options setting is Edge Control. The Edge Control setting determines how edges are rendered., consists of two components: Adaptive Halftoning and Trapping. The Adaptive Halftoning setting increases the edge sharpness of text and graphics while maintaining the quality of area fills. The Trapping setting reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects. The following options are available:
•
Off, which sets Trapping and Adaptive Halftoning to Off.
•
Light, which provides minimal trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On.
•
Normal, which provides the default Trapping setting. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On.
•
Maximum, which provides the most trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP PCL 6 and PS unidriver features
179
Note
PS Device Settings tab
The Device Settings tab can be found in the Properties for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 traditional PS printer driver.
To gain access to the printer driver Properties, click Start on your Window task bar, click Settings, and then click
Printers. Right-click the printer name, and then click Properties.
The Device Settings tab communicates the hardware configuration of the printer to the driver. The Device Settings tab appears whenever the driver is opened from the Printers folder by selecting and right-clicking the printer, and then clicking Properties… for the driver. When the driver is opened from within a software program, the Device Settings tab is not visible. When opened from the Printers folder, the Device Settings tab appears, as shown in the following illustration.
Figure 67: Device Settings tab
180
PS Device Settings tab Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
When you select features in the Device Settings tab that can be changed, a Change ... Setting dialog box opens in the bottom of the window.
Changes made to the Device Settings tab are not reflected in the Printing Preferences settings until the modified device settings have been applied. For example, the duplexing unit will not appear until you modify the
Device Settings tab, apply the settings, and then re-open Printing Preferences.
The Device Settings tab contains the following categories of options.
•
Form to Tray Assignment
•
Font Substitution Table
•
Installable Options
Form to Tray Assignment
A network administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the paper size in each paper tray.
Many printers support more than one source of paper, such as upper and lower trays. You can assign a form (which defines the paper size and margins) to each of your printer paper sources. When a form is matched to a source, you can select the form when you print from your software programs. The printer prints from the tray to which that form is assigned.
The Form to Tray Assignment setting allows network administrators to specify, in the driver, the media size that is loaded into each available paper tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that are available in the media-size list on the Advanced tab in the Printing Preferences driver tabs. This constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the printer with paper-mount messages that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.
The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays, high-capacity input trays, configurable sized paper trays (XY trays), and envelope feeders. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate
Installable Options setting. For example, tray 3 on the HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer is a high-capacity (500sheet) tray that is listed in both the Form to Tray Assignment setting and the Installable Options setting. The input trays listed here are also listed as paper sources on the Paper/Quality tab.
Font Substitution Table
Clicking this option displays the font substitution table and options for changing the TrueType-to-printer font mapping.
Available PostScript Memory
This control specifies the amount of available PS memory and provides a spin box for changing this value. The available PS memory is a subset of the printer total physical memory. It is usually best to use the default setting, which is determined by your printer manufacturer. The default PS memory setting for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printers is 5859 KB.
Output Protocol
This control specifies the protocol the printer will use for print jobs. The following options are available:
•
ASCII (default)
•
TBCP
•
Binary
When you click ASCII, data is sent in ASCII format (7-bit), which may take longer to print but can be sent through any
I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port. When you click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications
Protocol), all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and are faster than sending data in ASCII format.
Software Technical Reference ENWW PS Device Settings tab
181
Send Ctrl + D Before Each Job
This control specifies whether the printer will be reset at the beginning of every PS document. No is the default setting.
Ctrl + D resets the printer to its default setting to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job.
Ctrl + D might cause a print job to fail if the printer is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a printer connected through parallel or serial ports, change No to Yes.
Send Ctrl + D After Each Job
This control specifies whether the printer will be reset at the end of every PS document. Yes is the default setting.
Ctrl + D resets the printer to its default setting to ensure that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job.
Ctrl + D might cause a print job to fail if the printer is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer, change Yes to No.
Job Timeout
This control specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the printer before the printer stops trying to print the document. If you specify 0 seconds, the printer continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Wait Timeout
This control specifies how long the printer waits to get more PS information from the computer. After the specified time passes, the printer stops trying to print the document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you may want to increase this value. If you specify 0 seconds, the printer waits indefinitely.
The default setting is
300 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the PS driver downloads TrueType fonts as outline
(Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a bitmap (Type 3) font. This option lets you fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font Download option on the Advanced tab in Printing
Preferences. The default setting is 100 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of
32,767 pixels.
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline
This control specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the PS driver will download TrueType fonts as bitmap
(Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as an outline (Type 1) font. This option lets you fine-tune the Automatic setting or override the Send TrueType as Bitmap setting for the TrueType Font
Download option on the Advanced tab in Printing Preferences. The default setting is 600 pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
182
PS Device Settings tab Software Technical Reference ENWW
Installable Options
This section allows you to configure the printer-specific printing options that you can install for the
HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printers. The following controls are available:
•
Tray 3
•
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
•
Printer Memory
Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing)
If a duplexing unit is installed in the printer, select Duplex Unit (for 2-Sided Printing):, and then click Installed. The
HP Color LaserJet 3700dn and the HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn printer come with a duplex unit installed. The duplex unit is an optional accessory for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 and HP Color LaserJet 3700n printer. When the duplex unit is installed, the Print on Both Sides control appears in the Finishing tab, allowing you to turn on the duplex feature and select the type of binding for the print job, or to turn off the duplex feature.
Printer Memory
This option matches the setting to the amount of memory installed in the printer. The driver generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the printer can accept. The driver can use this information to manage how the driver uses the printer memory.
Software Technical Reference ENWW PS Device Settings tab
183
Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM
In-box file layout
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer system consists of two partitions: one for installation using Windows operating systems, the other for Macintosh operating systems. The files include documentation files and files that are required to install and uninstall the printing-system components.
Note
HP LaserJet software CD-ROM, Windows partition
The root directory in the Windows partition of the printing-system CD-ROM contains the AUTORUN.EXE file and the
SETUP.EXE file, as well as the following directories:
•
Fonts
•
Setup
•
XP_2000
This is also where the files reside for Windows Server 2003.
• Other directories for the languages that are on the printing-system software CD-ROM
The printing-system files for each language reside in the following directories:
• Drivers directory
• Manuals directory
• Reader directory
File layouts differ by language for the European and Asian versions of the software CD-ROM.
To view the files, insert the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software CD-ROM, right-click Start, click Explore, and then select the CD-ROM drive.
HP LaserJet software CD-ROM, Macintosh partition
The files contained in the Macintosh partition of the HP LaserJet software CD-ROM are grouped by language and reside in the following directories:
• Root directory
• HP LASERJET INSTALLERS (for Macintosh operating systems)
• PDF (for guides and manuals)
File layouts differ by language for the European and Asian versions of the software CD-ROM.
Availability and fulfillment
This section provides information about the availability of the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software and related software and firmware. Printing-system software on CD-ROM is available from HP fulfillment centers or can be downloaded from:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj3700_software
184
Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM Software Technical Reference ENWW
In-box CD-ROMs
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM is available in three regional versions. The following table lists the three versions of the software CD-ROM, along with the languages each version supports.
Table 18: CD-ROM versions
CD-ROM version
Americas
Languages supported
ensure these are correct and abbreviated correctly
Asian
Rest of world
Dutch (Nederland)
English
French (Français)
German (Deutsch)
Hebrew
Italian (Italiano)
Portuguese (Português) - Brazilian
Spanish (Español)
Chinese (Simplified)
Chinese (Traditional)
English
Japanese
Korean
Thai (Windows OSs only)
Arabic (Windows OSs only)
Czech (Cesky) (Windows OSs only)
Danish (Dansk)
English
Finnish (Suomi)
Greek (Documentation only)
Hungarian (Magyar) (Windows OSs only)
Norwegian (Norsk)
Polish (Polski) (Windows OSs only)
Russian (Russ) (Windows OSs only)
Swedish (Svenska)
Turkish (Turkçe)
Web ordering
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM and related software CD-ROMs can be ordered from:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj3700_software
The links for ordering the CD-ROMs appear on these pages.
Web deployment
Software to support HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printers is available for download from:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj3700_software
This is the preferred method for obtaining the latest software. The Web site offers a notification option for automatic e-mail notification about new software releases.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM
185
Printing-system software
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software is available for download from:
http://www.hp.com/go/clj3700_software
The software supports the following operating systems:
•
Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0
•
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003
Standalone drivers
The HP LaserJet PCL 6, and PS drivers are available individually to support the following operating systems:
•
Windows 98, and Windows Me
•
Windows NT 4.0
•
Windows 2000
•
Windows XP and Windows Server 2003
•
Mac 9.x
•
Mac OS X (10.1 or later)
Point-and-print bundles
Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step driver installation process. The first step is to install a shared driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the print server from a network client so that the client can use the print driver.
The HP LaserJet PCL 6 driver is available in a point-and-print bundle to support the Windows operating environments.
Other operating systems
Drivers and related software are available for these additional operating environments:
•
Macintosh OS (PPDs and Universal Installer)
•
OS/2 (PS)
•
UNIX
•
Linux
186
Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Software component availability
The following table lists the availability of HP LaserJet software components by operating system.
In the following table, "9x/Me" refers to Windows 98, and Windows Me; "2K" refers to Windows 2000; "4.0" refers to Windows NT 4.0; and "XP" refers to Windows XP.
Table 19: Software component availability for HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer
Component 9x/Me 4.0
2K/XP
3 Mac
Drivers
HP traditional PCL 6 driver
HP traditional PS driver
HP PCL 6 unidriver
HP PS unidriver
PS Driver and PostScript Printer
Description (PPD)
Mac PPD
UNIX Model Script
Linux printing drivers and model script
Installers
Common Windows Installer
CD-ROM Browser
Customization Utility
Fonts
INF File (Add Printer)
Font Installer
1
Macintosh Installer for OS 9.x
Macintosh Installer for OS X
Web Registration
Bidirectional communication
Network Bidirectional
Communications
Direct Connect Bidirectional
Communications
Enterprise Autoconfiguration
Macintosh AppleTalk
Remote management and status
Web JetAdmin
Applet for Web JetAdmin
Macintosh LJ Utility
Driver Autoconfiguration
Online Documentation
Adobe Acrobat Reader
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
User Guide for the
HP Color LaserJet 3700
User Reference Guide for the
HP Color LaserJet 3700
HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer Install Notes
HP Jetdirect Guide
Mac PS Driver Help ( Mac OS 9.x only)
Help systems
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
UNIX
X
X
X
Linux
Software Technical Reference ENWW Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM
187
Component 9x/Me
Other
PS Fonts X
1- Supported as a standalone utility.
X
4.0
X
2K/XP
3
X
Mac
X
UNIX Linux
2- The Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 HP unidrivers have no Update Now button, but autoconfiguration is supported over the network using TCP/IP and IP/IPX protocols.
3- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
188
Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM Software Technical Reference ENWW
Software component localization
The following table provides localization information about the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software. The information in this table does not necessarily reflect in-box solutions.
Components that are not available in any given language are supported in English.
Table 20: Software component localization by language, A-I
Component
1
PS PPD
Device Status and Alerts
Operating system
9x, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9x, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
Mac
X
3
AR CS DA NL EN FI
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X Macintosh PS
PPD
Macintosh LJ
Utility
Macintosh Install
Notes
PCL 6
Mac
Mac
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Printing System
Install Notes
Common
Windows Installer
Web JetAdmin
Web JetAdmin
Help
HP Embedded
Web Server
Online manuals
(PDF)
Standard fonts
PS 3 fonts
9x, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9x, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9x, 4.0,
2000
4.0, 2000,
UNIX
4.0, 2000,
UNIX
9x, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9x, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9x, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9x, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
X
X
2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
FR DE EL HE HU IT
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3
X
X
X
2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1- Check the following web site for current information about localized IBM OS/2 drivers:
http://www.ibm.com
2- The English manuals are used.
3- The English Device status and Alerts is used.
Language key:
AR = Arabic
CS = Czech
Software Technical Reference ENWW Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM
189
DN = Danish
NL = Dutch
EN = English
FI = Finnish
FR = French
DE = German
EL = Greek
HE = Hebrew
HU = Hungarian
IT = Italian
190
Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM Software Technical Reference ENWW
Table 21: Software component localization by language, J-Z
Component
PS PPD
Device Status and Alerts
1 Operating system
9 x, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9 x, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
Mac Macintosh PS
PPD
Macintosh LJ
Utility
Macintosh Install
Notes
PCL 6
Mac
Mac
Printing System
Install Notes
9 x, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9 x, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
9
x, 4.0,
2000
Common
Windows
Installer
Web JetAdmin 4.0, 2000,
Web JetAdmin
Help
HP Embedded
Web Server
2
UNIX
4.0, 2000,
UNIX
9 x, 4.0,
Online manuals
(PDF)
2000, XP,
2003
9 x, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003
Standard fonts
9 x, 4.0,
PS 3 fonts
2000, XP,
2003
9 x, 4.0,
2000, XP,
2003 x x x x x x x x x x x x
JA KO
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
NO
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
PT
x x x x x x x x x x
PL
x x x x x x x x x x
RU SC ES SV TC TH TR
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
1- Check the following web site for current information about localized IBM OS/2 drivers:
http://www.ibm.com
2- The Networking tab in the Embedded Web Server appears in English, French, Italian, German, and Spanish only.
Language key:
JA = Japanese
KO = Korean
NO = Norwegian
PT = Portuguese
PL = Polish
RU = Russian
Software Technical Reference ENWW Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM
191
SC = Simplified Chinese
SV = Swedish
ES = Spanish
TC = Traditional Chinese
TH = Thai
TR = Turkish
192
Structure and availability of the software CD-ROM Software Technical Reference ENWW
Driver feature comparison in various operating systems
The following tables detail the software features available for each driver type and for each supported operating system that the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printers support. The printing system driver for Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 is the new HP unidriver, with a user interface look and feel that is consistent across the PCL 6, and PS drivers. The printing-system drivers for Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0
are the HP traditional PCL 6 drivers and the HP traditional PS driver.
Job stream output
Table 22: Driver support for job stream output feature
Operating system
Driver type
Driver
PCL 6 support
PCL 6 pass-through support
PS 3
PS 2
UTF-8 encoding for
PJL
X
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
HP unidriver
PCL 6 PS
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
X
HP traditional driver HP traditional driver
PCL 6 PS PCL 6 PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows 98, Me
X
X
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
X
X
Mac
Mac
PS
Stream output modes
Table 23: Driver support for stream output modes feature
Operating system
Driver
RAW output
MS EMF output
EPS
X
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
PCL 6 PS
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
PCL 6
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Windows 98, Me
X
PCL 6
X
PS
X
Mac
PS
Connectivity
Table 24: Driver support for connectivity features
Operating system
Driver
Parallel
Network
USB
PCL 6
X
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
PS
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
PCL 6
X
X
PS
X
X
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Windows 98, Me
PCL 6
X
X
PS
X
X
PS
X
X
Mac
Software Technical Reference ENWW Driver feature comparison in various operating systems
193
Bidirectional communication
Table 25: Driver support for bidirectional communication features
Operating System
Driver
Parallel
Network
USB
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
X
X
PCL 6
X
PS
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
PCL 6
X
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Windows 98, Me
X
X
PCL 6
X
PS
X
X
PS
X
Mac
HP Driver Preconfiguration
Table 26: Driver support for HP Driver Preconfiguration
Operating system
Driver
HP Driver
Preconfiguration
Feature lockout
Enterprise
Autoconfiguration
(EAC)
X
X
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
PCL 6 PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
PCL 6 PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Windows 98, Me
X
X
X
PCL 6 PS
Mac
PS
UI features
Table 27: Driver support for UI features
Operating system
UI tabs
Driver
UI extensions
Page preview images X
Printer image bitmaps
X
X with hot spots
Paper size dimensions X
Page layout graphical representation
About . . .
Update now . . .
X
X
Printer bundle setting
Accessibility/disability X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
PCL 6 PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
PCL 6
X
X
X
X
X
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
PS
Windows 98, Me
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6
X
X
X
X
PS
X
X
Mac
X
X
PS
194
Driver feature comparison in various operating systems Software Technical Reference ENWW
Help features
Table 28: Driver support for Help features
Operating system
Driver
What's this Help (F1) X
Help button
Bubble Help
X
MS Windows "?" Help X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
PCL 6 PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
PCL 6
X
X
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
PS
Windows 98, Me
X
X
X
X
PCL 6
X
X
PS
Mac
PS
Constraint support
Table 29: Driver support for constraints
Operating system
PS
Constraint messages
Unavailable (gray-out) options
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
X
2
PCL 6
X
X
X
2
PS
Driver
Constraint warnings by symbol
X X
Windows NT 4.0
X
X
PCL 6
X
PS
X
Windows 98, Me
X
X
PCL 6
X
PS
X
Mac
X
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
2- Limited set of constraints.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Driver feature comparison in various operating systems
195
Document layout
Table 30: Driver support for document layout features
Operating system
Driver
Print on both sides
Manual duplex
Flip pages up
X
Booklet printing
Pages per sheet (N-up) X
X
X
Page borders on/off
Page order
Print document on
(alternative size)
Scale to fit
Allow scaling from large paper
% of normal size
Portrait
Landscape
Rotated by 180 degrees
Number of copies . . .
X
Ignore application collation
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
PCL 6 PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
PCL 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows 98, Me
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6
X
X
X
X
PS
X
X
X
X
X
Custom preference storage/recall
Table 31: Driver support for custom preference storage/recall features
Operating system
Driver
Print task quick sets
Print quality
Color options
X
X
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
PCL 6 PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
PCL 6
X
PS
X
X
X
Windows 98, Me
PCL 6
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
X
X
X
X
X
X
Mac
X
X
X
X
PS
Mac
X
PS
X
196
Driver feature comparison in various operating systems Software Technical Reference ENWW
Print controls
Table 32: Driver support for print controls
Operating system
Driver
EconoMode
DWS
Mopier enable
Print optimizations
Halftoning auto select
Halftoning dither 6x6
Halftoning dither 8x8
Rendering mode
(automatic)
Send graphics as vector
Send graphics as raster
Send page as raster
Resolution (ProRes
1200
180 lpi)
Resolution (ProRes
1200
212 lpi)
Resolution (FastRes
1200)
Resolution (600 dpi)
Resolution (300 dpi)
RET
Scale patterns
(WYSIWYG)
Font DIMM (on/off)
Send TrueType as bitmaps
TrueType fonts
Levels of gray
Edge to edge
Print text as black
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
PCL 6 PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
PCL 6
X
X
X
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
PS
X
X
X
X
X
Windows 98, Me
X
X
PCL 6
X
PS
X
X
X
X
Mac
PS
Software Technical Reference ENWW Driver feature comparison in various operating systems
197
Watermarks
Table 33: Driver support for watermarks feature
Operating system
Driver
First page only
Custom watermark definition
Watermark angle X
Watermark font name X
X
X
Watermark font color X
Watermark font X shading
Watermark font size X
Watermark font style X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
PCL 6 PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
PCL 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Windows 98, Me
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
Mac
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
198
Driver feature comparison in various operating systems Software Technical Reference ENWW
Paper sizes
Table 34: Driver support for paper sizes
Operating system
Letter
Legal
Executive
A4
A5
B5 (ISO)
B5 (JIS)
A3
11x17
8K
16K
B4 (JIS)
Driver
Executive (JIS) X
Double Postcard (JIS) X
Envelope #10
Envelope Monarch
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Envelope C5
Envelope DL
Envelope B5
Custom
Custom paper size definition
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
PCL 6 PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6
Windows 98, Me
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
Mac
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
Software Technical Reference ENWW Driver feature comparison in various operating systems
199
Paper types
Table 35: Driver support for paper types
Operating system
Driver
Unspecified
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Transparency
Prepunched
Labels
Bond
Recycled
Color
Light
<75g/m
2
Heavy
106-163 g/m
2
Cardstock
> 164 g/m2
Rough
Envelope
User type 1
User type 2
User type 3
User type 4
User type 5
Show media types as sources
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
PCL 6 PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
PS
Windows 98, Me
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
Mac
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
200
Driver feature comparison in various operating systems Software Technical Reference ENWW
Paper sources
Table 36: Driver support for paper sources
Operating system
Driver
Autoselect
Manual feed
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Assign paper size to tray
Assign paper type to tray
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
PCL 6 PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
PCL 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Windows 98, Me
X
X
X
X
X
PCL 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
Mac
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
Alternate source/paper type
Table 37: Driver support for alternate source/paper type feature
Operating system
Driver
All pages the same
Other pages
Back cover
X
X
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
PCL 6 PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
PCL 6
X
PS
X
X
X
Windows 98, Me
PCL 6
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Mac
X
X
PS
Software Technical Reference ENWW Driver feature comparison in various operating systems
201
Printing destination
Table 38: Driver support for printing destination feature
Operating system
Driver
Top bin (face down)
Straight paper path
X
X
Windows
XP
1
(32-bit),
Windows
2000
PCL 6
X
X
PS
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
PCL 6
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Installable options
Table 39: Driver support for installable options
Operating system
Driver
Duplexing unit
Total memory
Additional source trays X
Additional destination bins
Font DIMM
X
X
X
X
Windows XP
1
(32-bit), Windows
2000
PCL 6 PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows NT 4.0
PCL 6
X
X
X
X
PS
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Windows 98, Me
X
X
PCL 6
X
PS
Windows 98, Me
X
X
X
X
PCL 6
X
X
X
X
X
PS
Mac
X
PS
Mac
X
X
X
X
PS
202
Driver feature comparison in various operating systems Software Technical Reference ENWW
PS-specific features
Table 40: Driver support for PS-specific features
Windows XP
1 Windows NT 4.0
Operating system
Driver
Font substitution
PS memory
Output protocol
Send CTRL-D before each job
Send CTRL-D after each job
Convert gray text to
PS gray
Convert gray graphics to PS gray
Add euro currency symbol
Job timeout
Wait timeout
Minimum font size to download as outline
Minimum font size to download as bitmap
PS language level
X
X
X
X
Send error handler X
Mirrored output
Negative output
Output options
Optimize for speed X
Optimize for portability
X
X
X
Encapsulated (EPS) X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
PS
Archive format X
TrueType font download option
Outline
Bitmap
Native TrueType
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Windows 98, Me
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
1- Mac OS 9.0 through 9.2.2; not supported on Mac OS X or later.
PS
X
X
X
2
Mac
PS
Software Technical Reference ENWW Driver feature comparison in various operating systems
203
204
Driver feature comparison in various operating systems Software Technical Reference ENWW
4
Installing Windows printing system components
Introduction
The information that follows discusses these topics:
• Supported operating systems
• System requirements
• Font support
• General Windows installation instructions
• Detailed Windows installation instructions
• Setting a default printer
Note
Supported operating systems
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software supports the following Windows operating systems:
• Windows 98
• Windows Me
• Windows NT 4.0 (parallel and networked only)
• Windows 2000
• Windows XP
• Windows Server 2003
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer has not been tested with and does not support Windows 3.1x.
System requirements
The following are the system requirements for installing and using the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software on each of the supported operating systems.
• Pentium (R) processor
• Minimum 16-color/grayscale display with 640-by-480 pixel resolution (video graphics array [VGA])
• Same amount of RAM as the minimum requirements for the operating system
• 93 MB of available hard-disk space (on the same partition as the operating system) for full installation
• Onboard parallel port, USB port, or network connection
Software Technical Reference ENWW Introduction
205
Font support
Basic fonts
Microsoft Windows software includes these basic fonts, which can be used with any HP printer:
•
Arial
•
Courier New Italic
•
Times New Roman Italic
•
Arial Italic
•
Courier New Bold
•
Times New Roman Bold
•
Arial Bold
•
Courier New Bold Italic
•
Times New Roman Bold Italic
•
Arial Bold Italic
•
Symbol
•
Wingdings
•
Courier New
•
Times New Roman
Default fonts
The following default fonts are installed through a typical installation of the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software.
Table 41: Default fonts
File name
ALBR85W.TTF
ALBR55W.TTF
OLVR55W.TTF
OLVR75W.TTF
OLVR56W.TTF
CGOR45W.TTF
CGOR65W.TTF
CGOR66W.TTF
CGOR46W.TTF
CGTR45W.TTF
CGTR65W.TTF
CGTR66W.TTF
CGTR46W.TTF
CLAR67W.TTF
CORONET.TTF
CPSR45W.TTF
CPSR65W.TTF
CPSR66W.TTF
CPSR46W.TTF
GARR45W.TTF
GARR65W.TTF
Albertus Extra Bold
Albertus Medium
Antique Olive
Antique Olive Bold
Antique Olive Italic
CG Omega
CG Omega Bold
CG Omega Bold Italic
CG Omega Italic
CG Times
CG Times Bold
CG Times Bold Italic
CG Times Italic
Clarendon Condensed Bold
Coronet
CourierPS
CourierPS Bold
CourierPS Bold Oblique
CourierPS Oblique
Garamond
Garamond Bold
Font name
206
Font support Software Technical Reference ENWW
File name
GARR46W.TTF
GARR66W.TTF
HELR45W.TTF
HELR65W.TTF
HELR66W.TTF
HELR47W.TTF
HELR67W.TTF
HELR68W.TTF
HELR48W.TTF
HELR46W.TTF
AVGR45W.TTF
AVGR46W.TTF
AVGR65W.TTF
AVGR66W.TTF
BOKR75W.TTF
BOKR76W.TTF
BOKR35W.TTF
BOKR36W.TTF
CHANC___.TTF
DINGS___.TTF
LETR45W.TTF
LETR65W.TTF
LETR46W.TTF
MARIGOLD.TTF
NCSR75W.TTF
NCSR76W.TTF
NCSR56W.TTF
NCSR55W.TTF
PALR65W.TTF
PALR66W.TTF
PALR46W.TTF
PALR45W.TTF
SYMPS__.TTF
TIMR65W.TTF
TIMR66W.TTF
TIMR46W.TTF
TIMR45W.TTF
UNVR65W.TTF
UNVR66W.TTF
UNVR67W.TTF
UNVR68W.TTF
UNVR57W.TTF
UNVR58W.TTF
UNVR55W.TTF
UNVR56W.TTF
Garamond Italic
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
Helvetica*
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Bold Oblique
Helvetica Narrow
Helvetica Narrow Bold
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
Helvetica Oblique
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique
ITC Bookman Demi
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
Font name
ITC Bookman Light
ITC Bookman Light Italic
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
ITC Zapf Dingbats
Letter Gothic
Letter Gothic Bold
Letter Gothic Italic
Marigold
New Century Schoolbook Bold
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
New Century Schoolbook Italic
New Century Schoolbook Roman
Palatino Bold
Palatino Bold Italic
Palatino Italic
Palatino Roman
SymbolPS
Times* Bold
Times Bold Italic
Times Italic
Times Roman
Univers Bold
Univers Bold Italic
Univers Condensed Bold
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
Univers Condensed Medium
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
Univers Medium
Univers Medium Italic
Software Technical Reference ENWW Font support
207
Ninety-two additional PostScript 3 emulation (PS) fonts are also available on the CD-ROM.
Table 42: Additional PS 3 fonts
PS_13874.TTF
PS_13875.TTF
PS_14053.TTF
PS_14054.TTF
PS_14051.TTF
PS_13873.TTF
PS_13870.TTF
PS_13871.TTF
PS_12542.TTF
PS_12544.TTF
PS_10695.TTF
PS_12545.TTF
PS_12543.TTF
PS_14526.TTF
PS_14528.TTF
PS_14529.TTF
PS_14527.TTF
PS_24519.TTF
File name
PS_12639.TTF
PS_12640.TTF
PS_14530.TTF
PS-11120.TTF
PS_11119.TTF
PS_11118.TTF
PS_11846.TTF
PS_24516.TTF
PS_12704.TTF
PS_14508.TTF
PS_12581.TTF
PS_12585.TTF
PS_12586.TTF
PS_12582.TTF
PS_24517.TTF
PS_24518.TTF
PS_14513.TTF
PS_10269.TTF
PS_12968.TTF
PS_10369.TTF
PS_10370.TTF
PS_14514.TTF
PS_14515.TTF
PS_10249.TTF
PS_10267.TTF
PS_10268.TTF
PS_14512.TTF
PS_14511.TTF
PS_10267.TTF
PS_24509.TTF
PS_13872.TTF
Albertus MT
Albertus MT Italic
Albertus MT Light
Antique Olive CompactPS
Antique Olive Roman
Antique Olive Roman Bold
Antique Olive Roman Italic
Apple Chancery Italic
Bodoni Poster
Bodoni PosterCompressed
BodoniPS
BodoniPS Bold
BodoniPS Bold Italic
BodoniPS Italic
Candid
Chicago
Clarendon Light
ClarendonPS
ClarendonPS Bold
Cooper Black
Cooper Black Italic
Copperplate32bc
Copperplate33bc
Coronet
Eurostile
Eurostile Bold
Eurostile Bold ExtendedTwo
Eurostile ExtendedTwo
Eurostile Medium
Geneva
GillSans
GillSans Bold
GillSans Bold Italic
GillSans Condensed
GillSans Condensed Bold
GillSans ExtraBold
GillSans Italic
GillSans Light
GillSans Light Italic
Goudy
Goudy Bold
Goudy Bold Italic
Goudy ExtraBold
Goudy Italic
Helvetica Condensed
Helvetica Condensed Bold
Helvetica Condensed Bold Italic
Helvetica Condensed Italic
Hoefler Text
Font name
208
Font support Software Technical Reference ENWW
File name
PS_24521.TTF
PS_24522.TTF
PS_24520.TTF
PS_24523.TTF
PS_14503.TTF
PS_14505.TTF
PS_14506.TTF
PS_14504.TTF
PS_13778.TTF
PS_13777.TTF
PS_13779.TTF
PS_13780.TTF
PS_12675.TTF
PS_12677.TTF
PS_12625.TTF
PS_12623.TTF
PS_94073.TTF
PS_14525.TTF
PS_24524.TTF
PS_24510.TTF
PS_12506.TTF
PS_12510.TTF
PS_12511.TTF
PS_12507.TTF
PS_14072.TTF
PS_11546.TTF
PS_11545.TTF
PS_11547.TTF
PS_11548.TTF
PS_14507.TTF
PS_13501.TTF
PS_14023.TTF
PS_14024.TTF
PS_13502.TTF
PS_14030.TTF
PS_14040.TTF
PS_14021.TTF
PS_14022.TTF
PS_14029.TTF
PS_14039.TTF
PS_13548.TTF
PS_13547.TTF
PS_14481.TTF
PS_14480.TTF
Hoefler Text Black
Hoefler Text Black Italic
Hoefler Text Italic
Hoefler Text Ornaments
Joanna MT
Joanna MT Bold
Joanna MT Bold Italic
Joanna MT Italic
Letter Gothic Italic
Letter GothicPS
Letter GothicPS Bold
Letter GothicPS Bold Italic
Lubalin Graph
Lubalin Graph Bold
Lubalin Graph Bold Italic
Lubalin Graph Italic
Marigold
Mona Lisa Recut
Monaco
New York
Optima
Optima Bold
Optima Bold Italic
Optima Italic
Oxford Italic
Stempel Garamond Roman Italic
StempelGaramond Roman
StempelGaramond Roman Bold
StempelGaramond Roman Bold Italic
Taffy
Univers 45 Light
Univers 45 Light Bold
Univers 45 Light Bold Italic
Univers 45 Light Italic
Univers 47 Condensed Light Bold
Univers 47 CondensedLIght Bold Italic
Univers 55
Univers 55 Italic
Univers 57 Condensed
Univers 57 Condensed Italic
Univers Extended Italic
Univers ExtendedPS
Univers ExtendedPS Bold Italic
Univers ExtendedPS Italic
Font name
Software Technical Reference ENWW Font support
209
Installation instructions
General installation for Windows 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and 2003
General installation instructions for the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems are similar.
If the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer is connected through a file or print server, the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software must first be installed on the server before being installed on any client systems. If the HP
LaserJet printing-system software is not first installed on the server, then bidirectional communication, some Driver
Autoconfiguration methods, and Device Status and Alerts are not available to the client systems.
For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, administrator rights on the system are necessary to install the software.
When the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing system installer runs, the HP LaserJet uninstaller is always added to the system.
Note
Installing from the printing-system CD-ROM
Follow these instructions to install the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing system from the CD-ROM that came with your printer.
1. Close all programs that are open on your computer.
2. Insert the CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
If your CD-ROM does not start automatically, click Start, click Run, and then browse to and double-click the
SETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the CD-ROM.
3. Click Install Printer and follow the onscreen prompts.
Installing from a network or from downloaded files
Follow these instructions if you downloaded the files from the Web, or if you are installing the printing system files from a network. You might need to see your network administrator for the location of the printing-system software file.
1. Browse to the location of the SETUP.EXE file.
2. Double-click the SETUP.EXE file.
3. Click Install Printer and continue to follow the instructions until the printer is installed. For detailed installation instructions, see the "Detailed Windows installation" section of this guide.
Detailed Windows installation
This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for installing the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software in Microsoft Windows environments. You can choose to install the software by using either a typical installation or a custom installation.
Note
Typical Installation dialog box sequence
The dialog boxes shown here appear in the Windows XP Pro installation sequence. The order and appearance of dialog boxes can vary among operating systems.
210
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
The typical installation includes the following components:
•
HP Color LaserJet 3700 PCL 6 driver.
•
Screen fonts.
•
Driver Autoconfiguration (in environments that support bidirectional communication). This option does not appear in unsupported bidirectional communications environments.
The following illustration represents an overall path through the installation process. It is intended as a reference only; choices and setups will vary.
Figure 69: Choose Setup Language dialog box
Note
The components of a typical installation might vary from printer to printer.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
211
When you select the Install Printer option from the HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM, the Choose Setup
Language dialog box appears. This dialog box does not appear when the setup language is Hebrew or Arabic.
Figure 70: Choose Setup Language dialog box
Note
The Choose Setup Language dialog box lists only the languages that are available on the
HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM.
Table 43: Choose Setup Language dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Choose Setup Language
Text in dialog box
Select the language for this installation from following the choices:
(Drop-down menu lists available languages for installation.)
User options and descriptions
The installer automatically detects the language that your computer system uses and presents this choice as the default.
You can select another language that is available on the CD-ROM by clicking the down arrow of the dropdown menu.
Clicking OK initiates the printing system setup.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Exit Setup dialog box.
212
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Next, the Preparing to Install dialog box appears.
Figure 71: Setup dialog box
Note
While the Preparing to Install dialog box appears, the installer is decompressing files into the system Temp directory. The elapsed time to complete this action depends upon the performance of your system.
Table 44: Setup dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Preparing to Install
Text in dialog box
HP Color LaserJet 3700 Setup is preparing the InstallShield(R)
Wizard, which will guide you through the rest of the setup process. Please wait.
User options and descriptions
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Exit Setup dialog box.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
213
Figure 72: Welcome dialog box
Table 45: Welcome dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Welcome to the HP LaserJet 3700
Setup Wizard
Text in dialog box
Welcome to the HP Color
LaserJet 3700 Printing System
Setup Wizard.
This Wizard will help you set up your HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer. It is strongly recommend that you close all other programs before running this Setup wizard.
Before continuing, please read the software agreement. If you agree to the terms of the License
Agreement, click 'Next' to continue.
If not, click 'Cancel' now to exit
Setup.
Copyright Hewlett-Packard 2001
User options and descriptions
Clicking
Software License
Agreement takes you to the
HP Software License Agreement
dialog box.
Clicking Installation Notes opens the file
LJ3700_INSTALL_NOTES_ENWW
.RTF
Clicking Next takes you to the
Type of Connection dialog box
Clicking
Cancel takes you to the
Exit Setup dialog box.
214
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 73: HP Software License Agreement dialog box
Table 46: HP Software License Agreement dialog box text strings
Text in dialog box
Title of dialog box
HP Software License Agreement Please read the following license agreement Use the scroll bar to view the entire agreement
User options and descriptions
Clicking OK takes you back to the
Welcome dialog box.
(Scrolling fields with text of license agreement)
Note: The limited warranty for this product and accompanying software is located in the product documentation that you received with this product. Please review it at this time.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
215
Figure 74: Printer connection dialog box
Table 47: Printer connection dialog box text strings
Text in dialog box
Title of dialog box
Printer Connection
How is your HP Color LaserJet
3700 connected to this computer?
Connected directly to this
computer (option button): The printer is connected directly to this computer with a USB cable, parallel cable, or infrared. Or the printer is attached via another port that already exists to this computer.
Connected via the network
(option button):
The printer is connected to the network or shared through another computer on the network. It can be accessed by multiple computers.
User options and descriptions
If you select
Connected directly to
this computer (a "direct connection" using a parallel cable, universal serial bus cable, or infrared connection), clicking
Next
takes you to the
Connector Type
dialog box, and then to the
Model
dialog box. This is the default option.
If you select
Connected via the
network, clicking Next takes you to the Network Setup dialog box.
Clicking Back returns you to the
HP Color LaserJet 3700 Setup dialog box.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Exit Setup dialog box.
216
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 75: Network setup dialog box
Table 48: Network setup dialog box text strings
Text in dialog box
Title of dialog box
Network setup
Select a network setup option. If you are not sure, click ‘Help me determine which network setup is right for me’.
Basic network setup for a PC or server (recommended) (option button) Create a connection
(network port) to a printer that is attached directly to the network.
Your computer will manage its own print jobs and may optionally share the printer with other users. (option button)
Client setup for client-server printing. Connect to another PC on the network (i.e., the printer is already set up and shared out by another computer). (option button)
Help me determine which setup is right for me (option button)
User options and descriptions
If you select
Basic network setup
for a PC or server, clicking Next takes you to the
Specify Network
Path dialog box, and then to the
Installation Type dialog box.
If you select
Client setup for
client-server printing, clicking
Next initiates a series of question dialog boxes that help you determine the best connection-type option to follow. This series begins with the
Cable Type Selection
dialog box.
If you select
Help me determine
which setup is right for me, clicking Next takes you to the
Connection Type dialog box.
Clicking Back returns you to the
Network Setup dialog box.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Exit Setup dialog box.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
217
Figure 76: Connection type dialog box
Table 49: Connection type dialog box text strings
Text in dialog box
Title of dialog box
Connection type
Select the type of cable the printer is using.
Parallel Cable (option button)
USB Cable (option button)
Network Cable (option button)
User options and descriptions
Clicking
Parallel Cable or USB
Cable and then clicking Next takes you to the Cable Connection screen.
Clicking Network Cable and then clicking Next takes you to the Print
Job Management screen.
Clicking Back takes you to the either the Print Job management screen or the Cable Connection screen, depending on previous choices.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Setup Wizard cancel screen. Text:
Are you sure you want to cancel the installation?
218
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 77: Cable connection dialog box
Table 50: Installation type dialog box text strings
Text in dialog box
Title of dialog box
Cable connection
Indicate whether the cable is connected to a print server or another PC. The cable connects the printer to: A Jetdirect Print
Server (option button) (default)
Another PC (not this PC) (option button).
User options and descriptions
Clicking
A JetDirect Print Server, and then clicking Next takes you to the Print Job Management screen.
Clicking Another PC (not this PC, and then Next takes you to the
Recommended Network Setup for client-server printing screen.
Clicking Back takes you to the
Connection Type screen
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Setup Wizard cancel screen. Text:
Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? .
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
219
Figure 78: Print job management dialog box
Table 51: Print job management dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Print Job Management
Text in dialog box
Choose how print jobs will be managed.
Your PC will send print jobs:
Directly to the device through the network (option button)
NOTE: Your PC will manage its own print jobs. Later, it can be set up to be ‘shared’ and manage print jobs from other PCs
To another PC already setup to manage print jobs (option button)
User options and descriptions
Clicking either selection takes you to the
Recommended Network
Setup screen.
Clicking
Cancel takes you to the
Setup Wizard cancel screen. Text:
Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? .
220
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 79: Recommended Network Setup dialog box
Table 52: Recommended Network Setup dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Recommended Network Setup
Text in dialog box
Setup has determined you have the following network setup. Based on the selections you made, Setup has determined that your network setup is:
(Basic network setup for a PC or server or Client-Server setup, depending on previous selections)
This recommendation is based on the following selections: -Parallel cable connected to a Jetdirect print server -Your PC will send print jobs directly to the device through the network.
Click ‘Next” to continue with the installation.
User options and descriptions
Clicking Nexttakes you to the
Identify Printer screen.
Clicking Back takes you to either the Cable Connection screen or the
Network setup screen, depending on the option you selected in the previous screen.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Setup Wizard cancel screen. Text:
Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? .
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
221
Figure 80: Identify Printer dialog box (1 of 2)
Table 53: Identify Printer dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Identify Printer
Text in dialog box
Setup can search for printers on your network or you can specify a particular printer by its address.
Choose a method to identify the printer you want to install.
Search from a list of detected printers (recommended) (default option button)
Specify a printer by address (option button)
Description: A text box displays the description of the selected feature.
User options and descriptions
Clicking Help takes you to contextsensitive HTML help.
Clicking
Search from a list of detected printers
(recommended), and then Next, takes you to the
Select Printer
screen. The search returns a list of networked printers.
Clicking
Specify a printer by
address, and then Next, takes you to the Specify Printer screen.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Setup Wizard cancel screen. Text:
Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? .
222
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 81: Select Printer (1 of 2) dialog box
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
223
Figure 82: Select Printer (2 of 2) dialog box
Table 54: Select printer dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Select Printer
Text in dialog box
(1 of 2) Select the printer you want to install. Refer to your printer’s configuration (test) page to help you identify it.
Searching the local network for available HP Color LaserJet 3700 printers. Please wait…
(2 of 2) Select the printer you want to install. Refer to your printer’s configuration (test) page to help you identify it.
Detected HP Color LaserJet 3700 printers on your local network: ( A text box appears listing model numbers, hardware addresses, IP addresses, and IPX addresses of printers on the network)
If your printer is not on the list, check your printer’s connections, and then click Refresh. (This action repeats the search process)
NOTE: If your printer has just been turned on, it may take a few minutes for it to initialize before if can be detected on the network.
User options and descriptions
Clicking Help takes you to context sensitive HTML help.
Clicking Back takes you to the
Identify Printer screen.
Clicking Next takes you to the
Network Configuration Options
screen
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Setup Wizard cancel screen. Text:
Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? .
224
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 83: Network Configuration Options dialog box
Table 55: Network Configuration Options dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box Text in dialog box
Network Configuration Options
Setup can configure your printer’s network settings or you can configure them on you own. What do you want Setup to do?
Configure network setting for me
(option button)
Let me configure my own network settings (option button). Description:
User options and descriptions
Clicking
Configure network
setting for me, then clicking Next, takes you to the Network
Configuration Complete screen. On that screen, clicking
View Network
Settings takes you to a list of network settings. Then, clicking
OK
returns you to the Network
Configuration Complete screen.
A text box labelled "Description" displays the description of the selected option.
Clicking
Let me configure my own
network settings, then clicking
Next, takes you to the Set Network
Communication Mode screen.
Clicking Help takes you to contextsensitive HTML Help.
Clicking Back takes you to the
Network Configuration Options screen.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Setup Wizard cancel screen. Text:
Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? .
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
225
Figure 84: Set Network Communication Mode dialog box
Table 56: Set Network Communication Mode dialog box text string
Title of dialog box
Set Network Communication
Mode
Text in dialog box
Select a communication mode for this printer and specify the required settings. Communication Mode:
(drop-down box with the Windows
TCP/IP (recommended)
TCP/IP Settings
The following TCP/IP settings are specified for the printer.
IP Address: (text box with IP address
User options and descriptions
Clicking Change Settings... takes you to the Change Settings dialog box, where you may enter a different IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway address. Clicking
OK
returns you to the Set Network
Communications screen.
Clicking Next takes you to the
Model screen or the Network
Configuration Complete screen, depending on previous choices.
Subnet Mask: (text box with subnet mask)
Gateway: (text box with gateway)
Use Default Port Name (check box)
Clicking Back returns you to the
Select Port dialog box when you are performing a direct connection installation, or to the
Set Network
Communication Mode dialog box when you are performing a network installation.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Exit Setup dialog box.
226
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 85: Model dialog box
Note
The components of a Typical Installation might vary from printer to printer.
Table 57: Installation Type dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Model
Text in dialog box
Select your printer model. (A list box shows available models.
A text box labeled “Description” provides information about the features for each printer selected.
User options and descriptions
Clicking Back takes you to the
Connector Type screen.
Clicking Next takes you to the
Installation Type screen.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Setup Wizard cancel screen. Text:
Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? .
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
227
Figure 86: Installation Type dialog box
Table 58: Installation Type dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Installation Type
Text in dialog box
Setup can install the most common drivers and components, or you can select them on your own.
Typical Installation
(Recommended) (default option button) (Text box lists components of typical installation: HP LaserJet toolbox, HP Color LaserJet 3700
PCL 6 Driver, Screen Fonts, Install
Notes)
Recommended for most users.
Installs the most common drivers and components.
Custom Installation (option button)
Recommended for advanced users and system administrators.
Provides more flexibility for installing drivers and software.
User options and descriptions
Clicking
Typical Installation
(Recommended), and then Next, takes you to the Printer Name screen.
Clicking Custom Installation, and then Next, to view the Features screen.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Setup Wizard cancel screen. Text:
Are you sure you want to cancel the installation? .
228
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 87: Features dialog box
Note
When you do not share the printer, additional driver support is not available. If you share the printer on Windows
NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 operating systems by selecting Share as, you must type a name. You can also provide additional printer driver support for other operating systems.
Table 59: Features dialog box text strings
Features
Title of dialog box Text in dialog box
Click on an icon in the list below to change how a feature is installed with this printer. The icon next to the feature name indicates the install state of the feature.
Click the icon to drop down the install state menu for each feature.
Features: (drop down menu)
HP Color LaserJet 3700 PCL 6
Driver
HP Color LaserJet 3700 PS Driver
HP LaserJet toolbox
Screen Fonts
Install Notes
User Guide
Description: (A text box displays the description of the selected feature, including driver suggestions and space requirements.)
User options and descriptions
Click Help to view the Custom
Setup Tips screen (this may be an error in the driver)
Click Space to view available space on your hard drive.
Click Back to view Installation
Type Screen, with Custom
Installation selected.
Click Next to view the Printer
Name Screen.
Click Cancel to view the Setup
Wizard cancel screen. Text: Are you sure you want to cancel the installation?
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
229
Figure 88: Printer Name dialog box
Table 60: Printer Name dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Printer Name
Text in dialog box
Specify a name for this printer. You may use the name supplied below or type a new one. The name will be used to identify the printer in your Printers folder.
Printer Name (A list box displays available printer names.)
Default printer: Use this printer as the default printer for Windowsbased programs (check box)
User options and descriptions
Clicking Back takes you to either
Installation Type or Features, depending on previous choices.
Clicking Next takes you to the
Printer Sharing screen.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Setup Wizard cancel screen. Text:
Are you sure you want to cancel the installation?
230
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 89: Printer Sharing Setup dialog box
Table 61: Printer Sharing dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Printer Sharing
Text in dialog box
Indicate whether your computer will offer this printer as a shared resource for other network users.
Not shared (option button)
Share as (option button) (Text box
– enter printer share name)
NOTE: Exceeding 12 characters may make the printer inaccessible to Windows 98/Me clients.
User options and descriptions
Clicking Not shared and then clicking Next takes you to the
Printer Location and Comment screen or the Installation Type screen
Clicking Share as: causes the text box to become active. Entering the share name and then clicking
Next
takes you to the Client Driver and
Support screen.
Clicking Back takes you to the
Printer Name screen or the
Installation Type screen, depending on previous choices.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Setup Wizard cancel screen. Text:
Are you sure you want to cancel the installation?
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
231
Figure 90: Client Driver and Support dialog box
Table 62: Client Driver and Support dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Printer Sharing
Text in dialog box
Select additional drivers to be installed on this computer to support automatic driver download to clients.
Select the drivers you would like to install:
Windows 98/Me (check box)
User options and descriptions
Clicking Back takes you to the
Printer Sharing screen.
Clicking
Next takes you to the
Printer Location and Comment screen.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Setup Wizard cancel screen. Text:
Are you sure you want to cancel the installation?
232
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 91: Client Driver Support dialog box
Table 63: Client Driver Support dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Client Driver Support
Text in dialog box
Select additional drivers to be installed on this computer to support automatic driver download to clients.
Select the drivers you would like to install: Windows 98/Me (check box)
User options and descriptions
Clicking Next takes you to the
Printer Location and Comment screen.
Clicking Back takes you to the
Printer Sharing screen.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Setup Wizard cancel screen. Text:
Are you sure you want to cancel the installation?
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
233
Figure 92: Ready to Install dialog box
Table 64: Ready to Install dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Ready to Install
Text in dialog box
The wizard is ready to begin installation .
Click 'Install to begin the installation.
If you want to review or change any of your installation settings, click
'Back'. Click 'Cancel' to exit the wizard.
User options and descriptions
Clicking Install starts the installation process.
Clicking Back takes you to the
Printer Location and Comment screen.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Setup Wizard cancel screen. Text:
Are you sure you want to cancel the installation?
Custom Installation
The Custom Installation gives you the option of installing the following components:
•
HP Color LaserJet 3700 PCL 6 Driver (for direct-connect and network installations)
•
HP Color LaserJet 3700 PS Driver (for direct-connect and network installations)
•
Device Status and Alerts (for direct-connect (for Job Status only) and for network installations)
•
Screen fonts (for direct-connect and network installations)
•
User Guide (the User Reference Guide for the HP Color LaserJet 3700, for direct-connect and network installations) replace screen
234
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 93: Components dialog box, Custom Installation
Note
The components of a Custom Installation might vary from printer to printer.
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 computers running a terminal server do not support the Device Status and Alerts option.
The appearance of the Components dialog box might vary, depending on printer and connection type.
Table 65: Custom Installation dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Components
Text in dialog box
Select the components you want to install.
Components:
(list with check boxes)
Description
(Conditional text, according to the item currently highlighted in the list)
Space Required
(Specifies disk space required to install components in currently selected in list)
Space Available
(Specifies disk space available on disk drive specified in
Choose
Destination Location dialog box)
User options and descriptions
Clicking Next takes you to the
Printer Name dialog box.
Clicking Back returns you to the
Installation Type dialog box.
Clicking Cancel takes you to the
Exit Setup dialog box.
NOTE: Custom Installation automatically selects the options that are available in the Typical
Installation. You can also select from among the following components:
PCL 6 driver
PS driver
Device Status and Alerts
Screen Fonts
User Guide
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
235
Note
Product registration (HP WebReg)
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM browser provides two options for registering the HP
Color LaserJet 3700 series printer:
• registration through the Internet at:
http://register.hp.com
• registration by e-mail
Web registration for Hebrew and Arabic is in English.
To gain access to the product-registration options, go to the main menu of the HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-
ROM browser and click Register Product. This starts the HP WebReg utility and opens the following window.
Figure 94: Hewlett-Packard's Electronic Registration dialog box
236
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Table 66: Hewlett-Packard's Electronic Registration text strings
Title of dialog box
Hewlett-Packard's Electronic
Registration
Text in dialog box
Welcome to HP's registration. This information is confidential and for
HP registration purposes only. This is the fastest and easiest way for you to join our select group of
HP owners who register to receive:
Direct-to-you details about:
• Ideas and ways to use your new HP printer.
• Other exciting HP products.
• News on emerging technologies.
User options and descriptions
Clicking WWW Registration opens the default Web browser and connects to the product registration page at:
http://register.hp.com
Clicking
Electronic Registration
opens the
Welcome to Hewlett-
Packard's Registration dialog box.
Clicking Exit opens the Exiting
Registration! dialog box.
Technical support updates.
If you have internet access and would like to register via our World
Wide Web registration page, click here:
WWW Registration(button) (default option)
If you do not have internet access or would rather register via email, please click here to continue with
Hewlett-Packard's Electronic
Registration.
Exit(button)
Electronic Registration (button)
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
237
Figure 95: Welcome to Hewlett-Packard's Registration dialog box
Table 67: Welcome to Hewlett-Packard's Registration dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Welcome to Hewlett-Packard's
Registration
Text in dialog box
Welcome to HP's electronic registration. This information is confidential and for HP registration purposes only.
User options and descriptions
Clicking Previous returns you to the
Hewlett-Packard's Electronic
Registration dialog box.
Please select the country/region where you are located: (drop-down menu)
Please continue to go to the next screen and begin your registration
Exit (button)
Previous (button)
Continue (button)
(default option)
Clicking Continue starts a sequence of three dialog boxes.
The first dialog box provides fields for typing your registration information. The second dialog box prompts you for information about your HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer. The third dialog box gives you the option of sending the e-mail message to register the printer.
Clicking Exit takes you to the
Exiting Registration! dialog box.
238
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 96: Hewlett-Packard's Electronic Registration dialog box (1 of 3)
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
239
Table 68: Hewlett-Packard's Electronic Registration dialog box text strings (1 of 3)
Title of dialog box
Hewlett-Packard's Electronic
Registration
(This is the first of three dialog boxes.)
Text in dialog box
Please complete the following
(required fields are denoted by a blue asterisk):
(The following items are fields unless otherwise noted.)
User options and descriptions
Clicking Previous returns you to the
Welcome to Hewlett-
Packard's Registration dialog box.
Clicking Continue takes you to the second screen in this sequence.
First name*
Middle Initial
Clicking Exit takes you to the
Exiting Registration! dialog box.
Last Name*
Company/Organization Name*
Building/Mail Stop/Dept.
Mailing Address*
City/Town*
State* (drop-down menu)
Zip Code*
E-mail Address
Telephone Number
Extension
Occasionally HP communicates information on products and/or programs that may be relevant to you. Please select the method(s) of communication HP may use to contact you. (check all that apply)
E-mail (check box)
Mail (check box)
Telephone (check box)
Please don't contact me unless I specifically request it (check box)
Exit (button)
Previous (button)
Continue (button)
240
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 97: Hewlett-Packard's Electronic Registration dialog box (2 of 3)
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
241
Table 69: Hewlett-Packard's Electronic Registration dialog box text strings (2 of 3)
Title of dialog box
Hewlett-Packard's Electronic
Registration
Text in dialog box
Please tell us about the Hewlett-
Packard product you purchased:
User options and descriptions
Clicking Previous returns you to the first dialog box in this sequence.
(This is the second of three dialog boxes.)
Where will your new Hewlett-
Packard product primarily be used?
* (drop-down menu)
Clicking
Continue takes you to the third dialog box in this sequence.
Which Hewlett-Packard product did you purchase?* (drop-down menu)
When did you purchase your
Hewlett-Packard product?* (text box)
Clicking Exit takes you to the
Exiting Registration! dialog box.
Type the date that you purchased your Hewlett-Packard printer.
Serial Number* (text box)
Approximately how many employees work at your...site?
Worldwide?
What is your job responsibility as it relates to HP products?
Exit (button)
Previous (button)
Continue (button)
Type the printer serial number.
The questions about the number of employees and your job responsibility appear only if you answered that you plan to use your
HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer primarily for business or telecommuting. Drop-down menus that contain possible answers are provided for your convenience.
(Answering these questions is optional in the registration process.)
242
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 98: Hewlett-Packard's Electronic Registration dialog box (3 of 3)
Table 70: Hewlett-Packard's Electronic Registration dialog box text strings (3 of 3)
Title of dialog box
Hewlett-Packard's Electronic
Registration
(This is the third of three dialog boxes.)
Text in dialog box
Please send your registration to
Hewlett-Packard via e-mail.
E-mail (button) (default option)
Exit (button)
Previous (button)
User options and descriptions
Click the E-mail button to send an e-mail to HP that contains the registration information that you specified. A thank-you dialog box appears when the e-mail is sent.
Clicking Previous returns you to the second dialog box in this sequence.
Clicking Exit takes you to the
Exiting Registration! dialog box.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
243
Figure 99: Exiting registration! dialog box
Table 71: Exiting registration text strings
Title of dialog box
Exiting Registration!
Text in dialog box
You have selected to exit Hewlett-
Packard's registration.
If you would like to continue with registration, please press the continue button to return to the place where you exited.
Continue (button) (default option)
Otherwise, you may go to the URL below to register your product at any time.
http://register.hp.com/go/register
Thank you for your valuable time!
Exit (button)
User options and descriptions
Clicking Continue returns you to the dialog box where you were when you clicked the Exit button.
Clicking Exit closes the
HP WebReg utility.
244
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Customization Utility for Windows
Use the Customization Utility button to create your own customized installation of printing-system components. To start the utility, click Customization Utility on the main menu of the HP LaserJet software CD-ROM browser. The following are available options for creating a customized installation.
•
Create Customized Installer. Using this option, you can create either an interactive or silent (unattended) installer that has been customized by any of the following selections:
•
Language
•
Operating System
•
Printer Model
•
Components
•
Copy Entire Printing System installer. Using this option, you can copy the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system installer to a selected form of high-capacity media, such as a network drive. The customization utility prompts these choices:
• Language
• Operating System
• Destination Path
Silent installer
You can use the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software to create a silent installer that runs the installation program without user interaction. This installation method is useful when you want to use the default selections that the installer provides or when you want to run the installation without being prompted. You also have the option of creating a custom disk image that contains specific drivers and utilities, which allows you to run the installer without further interaction.
You can perform the silent installation in two ways:
• customized silent installer
• command-line silent installer
Customized silent installer
Use this option to select the printing-system components to include in the silent installation. You can select the operating system, language, printer models, drivers, utilities, and documentation to install.
HP preconfiguration
HP preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that you can use to customize HP and third-party software and distribute the software within managed corporate printing environments. Network administrators can use
HP preconfiguration to preconfigure printer drivers and other printing software, and to manage that software on client workstations remotely. With HP preconfiguration, you can retain customized printer settings during driver updates, rather than replace those settings with the default settings of the new driver.
Note
Command-line silent install
This method cannot be customized. It installs only the printing-system components that are included in the Typical
Installation.
Values that follow an equal sign ( = ) in a command line must not contain intervening spaces.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
245
246
Method 1: Command line
Type the following at the command line (do not type the beginning and ending quotation marks):
"<CD-ROM-ROOT>/SETUP/SETUP.EXE /U /PORT=XXXX /PRINTER=N /PD=N"
Method 2: SETUP.LST
Use the SETUP.LST file to specify command-line arguments to the installer for an unattended installation. You can send command-line arguments in one of the following ways:
•
Send the command directly to the installer.
•
Send the command using the SETUP.LST file located in the setup directory.
•
Use a combination of the two methods.
For example, this file contains two options: /port and /printer. The installer operates normally because the /u option has not been specified. If you use setup /u for the installer, it operates in the unattended mode and uses the two values specified in the defaults section of the SETUP.LST file. If you use setup /u /printer=1 for the installer, it operates in the unattended mode and chooses the HP Color LaserJet 3700hdn. The options specified on the command line override the options that are specified in the SETUP.LST file
The available options can also include the /u option. Using this option key makes the installer always operate in the unattended mode. The following descriptions explain the available options:
•
/u signals the installer to use the specified port and printer that are given on the command line (or in this file), and to use all of the of the default selections. Installation then proceeds without prompting you.
•
/port=xxxx specifies the default port when performing an unattended installation. The value that is specified by xxxx should be a valid port and should contain no spaces; for example, LPT1.
•
/printer=n specifies the default printer when performing an unattended installation. The value specified by "n" is an integer that references the list of available printers. For example, the following printers are available for the
HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer installation:
0 = HP Color LaserJet 3700n printer
1 = HP Color LaserJet 3700dn printer
•
/pd=n specifies whether the selected printer is the default printer when you have multiple printers connected to your network. The value specified by n is an integer (that is, 0 or 1). For this argument, typing a 1 sets the selected printer as the default printer. Typing a 0, or not specifying a value at all, sets the printer as a non-default printer.
You can preset these options in the SETUP.LST file that is located in the root directory of the HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM. In the defaults section, add the following syntax:
(Defaults)
Options= /port=<value> /printer=<number> /pd=<number>
For example, <value> = LPT1,
Driver-only installation
1. Close all software programs.
2. In Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, and and Windows 2000 OSs, click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers. In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click Start, click Control Panel, click Printers and
Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and other hardware devices (Windows XP Home).
3. Double-click Add Printer.
4. Answer the questions in the Add Printer Wizard dialog box until you reach the screen that shows the printer manufacturer list.
5. Click Have Disk.
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
6. Browse to the driver location by using one of these options: With Inbox CD-ROM, browse to the appropriate directory for your language, then browse to the operating system, and the driver. With Internet download, browse to the folder where the Web files were downloaded and decompressed.
Navigating to the operating system before the language (when using the Inbox CD-ROM option) leads you to the incorrect .INF file.
7. Select the appropriate information (.INF) file.
8. Click Open, and then click OK.
9. Select the appropriate printer.
10. Follow the remaining instructions on the screen to complete the printer installation. At this point, the driver has been copied to your hard disk and is included with the list of installed printers.
Note
Point and Print installation for Windows 98, Me, NT 4.0, 2000, XP, and 2003
The following information helps you install a printer driver by using the Microsoft Point and Print function when you cannot see the printer on the network.
Point and Print is a Microsoft term that describes a two-step driver installation process. The first step is to install a shared driver on a network print server. The second step is to "point" to the print server from a network client so that the client can use the print driver.
This section outlines the procedures for installing print drivers by using Point and Print. If these procedures are not successful, contact Microsoft.
Hewlett-Packard provides drivers that are compatible with the Point and Print feature, but this is a function of the
Microsoft operating systems, not of HP print drivers. Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows Server 2003 drivers from HP are supported only on Intel X86 processor types. Any other processor types must use Windows NT 4.0 drivers from Microsoft.
To install the printer driver on a Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 server, you must have administrator privileges. To completely install the Windows NT 4.0 printer driver on the Windows
NT 4.0 server (or the Windows 2000 printer driver on the Windows 2000 server), you must have administrator privileges on the server. The Windows NT 4.0 Printer .INF file (or the Windows 2000 Printer .INF file) must contain the same printer name as the Windows 98, or Windows Me printer .INF file.
Point and Print installation of a PS driver is supported only with a Microsoft Windows 98, or Windows Me PS driver version 4.0 or later.
In a homogenous operating system environment (one with all of the clients and servers running the same operating system), the same printer driver version that is vended from the server to the clients in a Point and Print environment also runs and controls the print queue configuration on the server.
However, in a mixed operating system environment (one in which servers and clients might run on different operating systems), conflicts can occur when client computers run a different version of the printer driver than the one on the print server. For more information, see the "Point and Print in a mixed operating system environment" section.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Installation instructions
247
For all operating systems, use the Add Printer Wizard to install the appropriate operating system driver on the server and client machines, as shown in the following table.
Table 72: Windows servers with Windows clients
Computer function
Steps
Server and clients 1. Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.
Server and clients 2. In the Printers folder, double-click the Add Printer icon to start the Add Printer Wizard.
Server only 3. Click Next, and then click Local Printer. Click Next. If your operating system is
Windows 98, or Windows Me, go to step 6.
Server and clients 4. Select the appropriate port in the list of ports, or click Add Port to connect to a network port that is not in the list of available ports.
Server and clients 5. Select the printer model in the list of available printers, or click Have Disk if you are installing the driver from an alternative source, such as disk, CD-ROM, or software download. If you are installing from a software download, you must know the path to where the software has been downloaded.
Server only
Server only
Server only
Client only
6. After the installation is complete, highlight the Printer icon and click File, and then click
Properties. In the Printer Properties window, click the Sharing tab.
7. You must enable the File and Print Sharing service for either Microsoft networks or
Novell networks on the server.
8. To exit Properties, click OK. A hand appears beneath the Printer icon in the Printers folder, indicating that the printer is shared.
9. You can install the driver using Point and Print in one of the following four ways:
Client only
Client only
Client only
•
In Network Neighborhood, locate the server and double-click the printer share name.
•
In Network Neighborhood, locate the server, and then drag and drop the icon for the shared printer into your Printers folder.
•
In the Printers folder, open the Add Printer Wizard. The next action depends on the operating system:
For Windows 98, and Windows Me, click Network Printer.
•
•
For Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003, click Network printer server.
10. Click
Next. Type the network path or queue name, or select Browse to search the network to locate the appropriate path.
11. In Network Neighborhood, locate the server and double-click. Then locate the printer share name and right-click.
12. Click Install to complete the installation through the Add Printer Wizard.
Setting a default printer
This section applies to the Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows
Server 2003 operating systems.
1. In Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, and and Windows 2000 OSs, click Start, click Settings, and then click
Printers. In Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, click Start, click Control Panel, click Printers and
Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and other hardware devices (Windows XP Home).
2. Select the printer that you want to set as the default printer.
3. From the File menu, click Set As Default. A check mark appears next to the menu option.
4. Click Close.
Windows 3.1x
The HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer has not been tested with and is not supported in Windows 3.1x.
248
Installation instructions Software Technical Reference ENWW
5
Installation for Macintosh, IBM
OS/2, and Linux operating systems
Introduction
This section provides system requirements and procedures for installing and removing the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software for supported operating systems other than Windows. It also provides information about font support and system modifications. Supported operating systems:
• Macintosh
• IBM OS/2
• Linux
System requirements
The following are system requirements for installing and using the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software on each of these supported operating systems.
Macintosh
•
68 K processor
•
Macintosh OS 9.x and Mac OS X (10.1 or later)
•
16 MB RAM
•
20 MB available disk space
IBM OS/2
•
Pentium processor
•
32 MB RAM (required for OS/2)
•
5 MB available disk space (required for driver)
Linux
For information about Linux support for the printer, see:
• the HP Linux support home page at:
http://hp.sourceforge.net
• the HP Linux Web site at:
http://www.hp.com/go/linux
Software Technical Reference ENWW Introduction
249
250
Macintosh
Macintosh component descriptions
The printer includes the following software for Macintosh computers:
•
PPDs for Mac 9.x and Mac OS X (10.1 or later).x
•
PDEs for Mac OS X only (10.1 and later)
HP LaserJet PPDs
In Mac OS 9.x, these PS printer-definition files for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printer are installed to the
Printer
Descriptions folder, which is in the Extensions folder within the System folder. In Mac OS X, the PPDs are installed in Library:Printers:PPDs:Contents:Resources:<lang>.lproj where <lang> is the appropriate localized folder.
PPDs, in combination with the driver, provide access to the printer features and allow the computer to communicate with the printer. An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the printing software CD-ROM.
For Mac OS 9.x and Mac OS X (10.1 or later).x, the Apple LaserWriter 8 driver must be installed to use the PPD file.
Use the Apple LaserWriter 8 driver that came with your Macintosh. For Mac OS X, use Print Center to print.
PDEs (Mac OS X only, 10.1 and later)
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) are code plug-ins that provide access to printer features, such as number of copies, duplexing, and quality settings.
HP LaserJet Utility
This Hewlett-Packard printer utility is installed to the HP LaserJet folder in Macintosh OS 9.x operating systems. It provides configuration and management support for PS.
Use the HP LaserJet Utility to control features that are not available in the driver. The illustrated screens make selecting printer features from the Macintosh computer easy. Use the HP LaserJet Utility to do the following:
• customize the printer control panel messages.
• name the printer, assign it to a zone on the network, download files and fonts, and change most of the printer settings.
• set a password for the printer.
• from the computer, lock out functions on the printer control panel to prevent unauthorized access. (See the printer software help.)
Install notes
This text file contains important information about printer features, instructions for installing the printing-system software, and technical assistance.
ColorSync profiles
These text files contain color-matching information for the Macintosh system and HP LaserJet color printers.
Online help
This HTML-based help system replaces the Apple Guide help system that was provided with Mac OS 9.x HP printers.
The help system can be viewed through a browser or in the Macintosh OS Help Center.
Screen fonts (Mac OS classic)
These screen fonts are available only for Macintosh computers and Macintosh-compatible computers. Because the screen fonts match your printer fonts, you can see onscreen how your printed page looks.
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
Font support
To ensure that you can use all of the installed fonts with the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printers, the Macintosh printing system includes the standard 35 screen fonts in 11 families:
•
Avant Garde
•
Helvetica Narrow
•
Times
•
Bookman
•
New Century Schoolbook
•
Zapf Chancery
•
Courier
•
Palatino
•
Zapf Dingbats
•
Helvetica
•
Symbol
The Macintosh printing system also includes the HP 45 XPS font families:
•
Clarendon Condensed Bold
•
Symbol
•
Albertus Medium
•
Coronet
•
Times New Roman
•
Antique Olive
•
Courier
•
Univers
•
Arial
•
Garamond
•
Univers Condensed
•
CG Omega
•
Letter Gothic
•
Wingdings
•
CG Times
•
Marigold
The following bitmap screen fonts reside on the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printers:
•
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
•
Helvetica
•
Palatino
•
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique
•
Helvetica Bold
•
Palatino Bold
•
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
251
252
•
Helvetica Bold Oblique
•
Palatino Bold Italic
•
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique
•
Helvetica Oblique
•
Palatino Italic
•
ITC Bookman Demi
•
Helvetica Narrow
•
Symbol
•
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
•
Helvetica Narrow Bold
•
Times Bold
•
ITC Bookman Light
•
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
•
Times Bold Italic
•
ITC Bookman Light Italic
•
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
•
Times Italic
•
Courier
•
New Century Schoolbook Bold
•
Times Roman
•
Courier Bold
•
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
•
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
•
Courier Bold Oblique
•
New Century Schoolbook Italic
•
ITC Zapf Dingbats
•
Courier Oblique
•
New Century Schoolbook Roman
The following fonts are resident on the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printers, but can be used by Macintosh platforms only if you install additional screen fonts. You can either use these screen fonts directly from the
HP Color LaserJet 3700 software CD-ROM, or obtain them from:
http://www.hp.com/support/clj3700
• Albertus Extra Bold
• CG Times Italic
• Marigold
• Albertus Medium
• Clarendon Condensed Bold
• Symbol
• Antique Olive
• Coronet
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
•
Times New Roman
•
Antique Olive Bold
•
Courier
•
Times New Roman Bold
•
Antique Olive Italic
•
Courier Bold
•
Times New Roman Bold Italic
•
Arial Courier Bold Oblique
•
Times New Roman Italic
•
Arial Bold
•
Courier Italic
•
Univers Bold
•
Arial Bold Italic
•
Garamond Antiqua
•
Univers Bold Italic
•
Arial Italic
•
Garamond Halbfett
•
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
•
CG Omega
•
Garamond Kursiv
•
Univers Condensed Medium
•
CG Omega Bold
•
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
•
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
•
CG Omega Bold Italic
•
Letter Gothic
•
Univers Medium
•
CG Omega Italic
•
Letter Gothic Bold
•
Univers Medium Italic
•
CG Times
•
Letter Gothic Italic
•
Univers Italic
•
CG Times Bold
•
CG Times Bold Italic
•
Wingdings
•
CG Times Bold Italic
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
253
Note
Installing the Macintosh printing system
On a Macintosh-compatible computer, the installation procedures are the same for a network administrator, a network client, and a single user. Install the software on any computer that has access rights to the printer.
If the computer is connected to the printer by a LocalTalk (printer port) or EtherTalk connection, you must configure the AppleTalk (or network) control panel for the correct connection to communicate with the printer. You must set up the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printers, connect them to the computer, and turn them on before the software is installed. Macintosh OS systems do not support parallel connections. You can use either a USB cable or a cross-over Ethernet cable for a direct connection to a computer running the Macintosh OS. In the following instructions, "XXXX" represents the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printer model number.
The Macintosh partition contains an installer program for each language. Find the language appropriate for the operating system being used, and then use the installer program for that language.
Note
To install the HP LaserJet printer software for the Macintosh OS
1. Insert the CD-ROM that came with the Macintosh printer software into the CD-ROM drive.
If the CD screen does not open automatically, double-click the CD-ROM icon on the desktop to open the CD-ROM window.
Note
Note
2. Open the HP LaserJet Installers folder. Find the Installer icon for the appropriate language. Double-click the
Installer icon to launch the Installer. In the opening dialog, click Continue.
The Continue button appears only after you type the "Admin" password in the Authenticate dialog box (OS X, versions 10.1 and later only).
3. The main Installer dialog box appears. Click Install and then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the software installation.
If you are installing the printer software on a Macintosh OS X system, please be patient. The installer must perform an initial search of the computer for up to 1 minute. During this time the installer might appear to be stalled.
Note
If you want to use the HP LaserJet utility (Mac OS 9.x only) by using a USB connection to configure Apple Talk
Zone or to name your printer, you must select Custom Install and then select HP USB and all of the other applicable components. Installing the HP USB components requires that you restart your computer. If you do not want to use the HP LaserJet utility, continue with the following Easy Install instructions.
4. When software installation is complete, click Quit. Choose one of the following options to finish setting up your printer:
•
Set up a USB direct printer connection with Mac OS 9.x or Mac OS X (10.1 or later).
•
Set up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac OS 9.x or Mac OS X (10.1 or later).
•
Set up a printer with Mac OS X (10.1 or later).
To set up an AppleTalk networked printer with Mac 9.x
1. Open the Chooser from within the Apple Menu.
2. Click LaserWriter 8 on the left side of the Chooser dialog box.
3. Click the appropriate Zone to select it, if required.
4. Click your printer name from the list that appears on the right side of the Chooser dialog box, and then click
Create.
254
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
To set up a printer with Mac OS X
1. In the Applications folder, open the Utilities folder, and then run the Print Center.
2. Click Add (in Mac OS X 10.2) or Add Printer (in Mac OS X 10.1).
3. From the top pop-up menu, select the appropriate connection type for your printer.
4. Select or type in any other information as indicated for the type of connection for your printer. For example, if you are using an AppleTalk connection, select your printer zone; or if you are using IP Printing, type in an IP address.
If the automatic selection fails, or if you want to manually select a PPD file, click the Printer Model pop-up menu, select HP, and then click Color LaserJet 3700.
5. Click Add.
6. To configure installable options in Mac OS X 10.2, such as a duplexing unit or optional paper trays, click the appropriate printer icon in the Print Center Printer List window. Select Show Info from the Printers menu, and then select the appropriate options from the Installable Options popup menu.
7. Configure the options, and then click Apply Changes.
To set up an IP/LPR networked printer with Mac OS 9.x
1. Run the Apple Desktop Printer utility.
2. Click Printer (LPR), and then click OK.
3. Click Change in the LPR Printer Selection area.
4. Click the appropriate IP address and Queue, and then click OK.
5. Click Change and scroll through the list of printers.
6. Click HP Color LaserJet 3700, and then click Select.
7. Click Create.
To set up a USB direct printer connection with Mac OS 9.x
1. Run the Apple Desktop Printer utility.
2. Select HP Printer (USB) if you installed this component during a Custom Install and intend to use the HP
LaserJet utility for configuration.
- OR -
Select Printer (USB), and then click OK.
3. Click Change in the USB Printer Selection area.
4. Select the USB printer in the Printer Selection window, and then click OK.
5. Click Auto Setup to attempt to match a PPD file and USB driver to your printer. If Auto Setup fails, click Change.
Scroll through the list of printers, select HP Color LaserJet 3700, and then click Select.
6. Click Create.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
255
Uninstalling the Macintosh printing system
To uninstall the Macintosh Printing System, drag the PPDs and the unwanted component(s) to Trash. See the tables in the following sections for a list of new folders and files added when the HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software is installed in Macintosh OSs.
In-box disk layout
The Macintosh Printing System consists of one file: the HP LaserJet Installer - Integrated installer program.
Note
Folders and files added through installation of the
HP Color LaserJet 3700 software (Mac OS)
The tables in the following sections detail the changes to your system as new folders and files are added when the
HP Color LaserJet 3700 printing-system software is installed on Macintosh OS systems.
This listing does not include temporary directories and files that are created, and then deleted, during the installation process.
In the following listing, "MACINTOSH HD" indicates the drive on which the software was installed.
256
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
Mac OS Classic installation
This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Mac OS Classic.
Main Install dialog box sequence
This subsection provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog box sequence for the Easy Install (the typical installation option).
Figure 100: HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box
Table 73: HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Splash screen
(This title does not appear in the dialog box.)
Text in dialog box
hp LaserJet for Macintosh
Continue... (button}
User options and descriptions
Click Continue to open the HP
LaserJet Installer dialog box.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
257
Figure 101: HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (easy install)
Table 74: HP LaserJet Installer dialog text strings (easy install)
Title of dialog box hp LaserJet Installer
Text in dialog box
Easy Install (drop-down menu)
Click the Install button to install:
Printer Descriptions (Classic) hp LaserJet Utility (Classic)
Install Notes (Classic) hp LaserJet Help (Classic)
Disk space available: (conditional)
Approximate disk space needed:
(conditional)
Items will be installed on the disk
"Macintosh HD" (name can be customized)
Quit (button)
Install (button) (default option)
User options and descriptions
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default
"Macintosh HD," click
Install
Location: to specify a location.
You can also choose the
Custom
installation option from the dropdown menu at upper left.
Easy
Install is the default.
Click Read Me to open the Installer readme file.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
NOTE: A Read Me... button appears on each Macintosh installation screen.
258
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 102: Important! dialog box (after easy install)
Table 75: Important! dialog text strings (easy install)
Title of dialog box
(This untitled dialog box begins with the words "Important! To set up your printer in OS 9.
x ")
Text in dialog box
Easy Install (drop-down menu)
Click the Install button to install:
Printer Descriptions (Classic) hp LaserJet Utility (Classic)
Install Notes (Classic) hp LaserJet Help (Classic)
Disk space available: (conditional)
Approximate disk space needed:
(conditional)
Items will be installed on the disk
"Macintosh HD" (name can be customized)
Quit (button)
Install (button) (default option)
User options and descriptions
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default
"Macintosh HD," click
Install
Location: to specify a location.
You can also choose the
Custom
installation option from the dropdown menu at upper left.
Easy
Install is the default.
Click
Read Me to open the Installer readme file.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
NOTE: A Read Me... button appears on each Macintosh installation screen.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
259
Figure 103: HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install)
Table 76: HP LaserJet Installer dialog text strings (custom install)
Title of dialog box hp LaserJet Installer
Text in dialog box
Custom Install (drop-down menu)
Printer Descriptions (Classic) hp LaserJet Utility (Classic)
Install Notes (Classic)
User options and descriptions
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default
"Macintosh HD," click
Install
Location: to specify a location.
hp LaserJet Help (Classic)
USB Components (Classic)
Select which of the available components to install by using the check boxes in the list.
hp Manual Duplex&Booklet
(Classic)
Disk space available: (conditional)
Approximate disk space needed:
(conditional)
Items will be installed on the disk
"Macintosh HD" (name can be customized)
Quit (button)
Install (button) (default option)
Click the Read Me to open the
Installer readme file.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system.
260
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 104: Installing dialog box
Table 77: Installing dialog text strings
Title of dialog box
Installing
Text in dialog box
Items remaining to be installed:
(conditional number)
Installing: HP LaserJet XXXX Series
Stop (button)
User options and descriptions
This dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the installation. Click Stop to interrupt the install file copy process.
Figure 105: Installation was successful dialog box
Table 78: Installation successful dialog text strings
Title of dialog box
(This untitled dialog box begins with the words "Installation was successful.")
Text in dialog box
Installation was successful. If you are finished, click Quit to leave the
Installer. If you wish to perform additional installations, click
Continue.
User options and descriptions
Click Quit to exit the Installer. The
Printer Setup Assistant opens.
Click Continue to return to the
HP LaserJet Installer.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
261
Figure 106: Important! dialog box
Table 79: Important! dialog text strings
Title of dialog box
Important
Text in dialog box
Important! To Set up your hp
LaserJet printer:
Open the Desktop Printer Utility and select a printer,
Appletalk - Select Printer
(AppleTalk)
USB - select HP printer OK.
User options and descriptions
Click OK to exit the Installer. The
Printer Setup Assistant opens.
Click Continue to return to the
HP LaserJet Installer.
262
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts Installer dialog box sequence
This section provides information about the installation dialog box sequence for the HP Screen Font Installer.
Figure 107: HP LaserJet Screen Fonts splash screen dialog box
Table 80: HP LaserJet Screen Fonts splash screen dialog text strings
Title of dialog box
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts
Text in dialog box
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts
(The phrase "Screen Fonts" is repeated in multiple scripts and languages.)
User options and descriptions
Click Continue to open the
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts dialog box.
Continue (button)
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
263
Figure 108: HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer dialog box
Table 81: HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer dialog text strings (1 of 2)
Title of dialog box
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts
Text in dialog box
Click the Install button to install:
User options and descriptions
Click Install to start the installation.
Screen Fonts
Install Location
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
Items will be installed on the disk
"Apple External HD"
Quit (button)
Install (button) (default option}
When you click Install, an installation progress bar dialog box briefly appears. The following table details the contents of that dialog box.
Table 82: HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer dialog text strings (2 of 2)
Title of dialog box
Installing
Text in dialog box
Items remaining to be installed:
(conditional number)
User options and descriptions
Click Stop to interrupt the install file copy process.
Stop (button)
264
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 109: Installation was successful dialog box
Table 83: Installation was successful dialog text strings
Title of dialog box
(This untitled dialog box begins with the words "Installation was successful.")
Text in dialog box
Installation was successful. If you are finished, click Quit to leave the
Installer.
If you wish to perform additional installations, click Continue.
User options and descriptions
Click Quit to exit the Installer.
Click Continue to return to the
HP LaserJet Screen Fonts installer.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
265
Mac OS X installation
This section provides information about the various installation dialog box sequences for the Mac OS X operating system.
Main Install dialog box sequence
This section provides information about the Macintosh installation dialog box sequence for the Easy Install (the typical installation option).
Figure 110: HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box
Table 84: HP LaserJet for Macintosh installer splash screen dialog box text strings
Title of dialog box
Splash screen
(This title does not appear in the dialog box.)
Text in dialog box
hp LaserJet for Macintosh
Continue... (button)
User options and descriptions
Click
Continue to open the
HP LaserJet Installer dialog box.
266
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 111: HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (easy install)
Table 85: HP LaserJet Installer dialog text strings (easy install)
Title of dialog box hp LaserJet Installer
Text in dialog box
Easy Install (drop-down menu)
Click the Install button to install:
Printer Dialog Extensions (OS X)
Printer Descriptions (OS X)
Printer Descriptions (Classic) hp LaserJet Utility (Classic)
Install Notes (Classic)
ColorSync Profiles
Disk space available: (conditional)
Approximate disk space needed:
(conditional)
Install location: Items will be installed on the disk "Mac"
Install Location (drop-down menu)
Quit (button)
Install (button) (default option)
User options and descriptions
If you want to install the files in a location other than the default
"Mac," click the
Install Location
drop-down menu to specify a location.
You can also choose a
Custom
installation option from the dropdown menu at upper left.
Click Read Me to open the Installer readme file.
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk
Click Quit to quit the Installer without making changes to the system.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
267
Figure 112: HP LaserJet Installer dialog box (custom install)
Table 86: HP LaserJet Installer dialog text strings (custom install)
Title of dialog box hp LaserJet Installer
Text in dialog box
Custom Install (drop-down menu)
Printer Dialog extensions (OS X)
Printer Descriptions (OS X)
Printer Descriptions (Classic)
User options and descriptions
Select the install location using the
Install Location drop-down menu
(if the desired location is different from "Mac").
hp LaserJet Utility (Classic)
Install Notes (Classic)
Select which of the available components to install by using the check boxes in the list.
hp LaserJet Help (Classic)
Disk space available: (conditional)
Click Read Me to open the Installer readme file.
Approximate disk space needed:
(conditional)
Install Location: Items will be installed on the disk "Mac"
Click Install to start the installation on the selected disk.
Click
Quit to quit the Installer without making any changes to the system.
Install Location (drop-down menu)
Quit (button)
Install (button) (default option)
268
Macintosh Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 113: Installing dialog box
Table 87: Installing dialog text strings
Title of dialog box
Installing
Text in dialog box
Items remaining to be installed:
(conditional number)
Installing: HP LaserJet XXXX Series
Stop (button)
User options and descriptions
This dialog box shows installation progress. No action is required unless you want to stop the installation. Click Stop to interrupt the install file copy process.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Macintosh
269
IBM OS/2 Warp 3.0 and later
OS/2 installation instructions
Installation procedures differ depending upon whether or not a printer object exists on the OS/2 desktop. Use the instructions that match the desktop.
Note
Installing a printer in OS/2 when the printer object is missing
Use this procedure when a printer object does not appear on the computer desktop. To create a printer object and install a printer driver, follow these steps:
Use this procedure if the OS/2 desktop does not have a printer object. A system can have this configuration if no printer was selected during OS/2 installation, or if all of the print objects have been deleted from the desktop.
1. Open the Templates folder that is located in the OS/2 system folder after OS/2 installation.
2. Click the Printer template. Press and hold the right mouse button.
3. Drag the template to the desktop.
4. Release the right mouse button.
5. Type a name for the printer in the Name field.
6. Select the port to which the printer is connected.
7. Click Install new printer driver. A window appears that contains a list of the printer drivers that are shipped with
OS/2.
8. Click Other printer driver.
9. Point to the downloaded printer drivers.
10. Click Refresh. Wait until the window fills with printer drivers.
11. Click the driver that you want.
12. Click Install.
Note
Installing a printer in OS/2 with a pre-existing printer object on desktop
To install a new printer driver using an existing printer object, use the following procedure:
If the 16-bit HP LaserJet driver is installed on a system, delete it before installing this driver.
Use these directions if a printer object exists on the OS/2 desktop, but you do not have the correct printer driver installed on the system. This could happen if a different printer has been added to the system.
1. Right-click the Printer object.
2. Click Settings.
3. Click the Printer Driver tab.
4. Right-click one of the Printer Driver objects.
5. Click Install.
6. Click Other OS/2 printer driver.
7. Point to the downloaded printer drivers.
8. Click the Refresh button. Wait until the window fills with printer drivers.
9. Click the driver that you want.
10. Click Install.
Additional information about the OS/2 drivers is included in the readme files that come with each driver.
270
IBM OS/2 Warp 3.0 and later Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Font support
Fonts can be downloaded to the printer by using the Font Installer feature of the printer driver.
•
Albertus
•
CG Times Italic
•
Symbol
•
Albertus Extra Bold
•
Clarendon Condensed
•
Times New Roman
•
Antique Olive - Coronet
•
Times New Roman Bold
•
Antique Olive Bold
•
Courier
•
Times New Roman Bold Italic
•
Antique Olive Italic
•
Courier Bold
•
Times New Roman Italic
•
Arial
•
Courier Bold Italic
•
Univers
•
Arial Bold
•
Courier Italic
•
Univers Bold
•
Arial Bold Italic
•
Garamond Antiqua
•
Univers Bold Italic
•
Arial Italic
•
Garamond Halbfett
•
Univers Italic
•
CG Omega
•
Garamond Kursiv
•
Univers Condensed
•
CG Omega Bold
•
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
•
Univers Condensed Bold
•
CG Omega Bold Italic
•
Letter
•
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
•
CG Omega Italic
Software Technical Reference ENWW IBM OS/2 Warp 3.0 and later
271
•
Letter Bold
•
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
•
CG Times
•
Letter Italic
•
Wingdings
•
CG Times Bold
•
Line Printer
•
CG Times Bold Italic
•
Marigold
Changing a printer driver in the printer object
After both the printer object and the printer driver have been installed, the correct printer driver should be selected in the print object. This might also be necessary if you are using different printer drivers with a single print object. To change to a different printer driver:
1. Right-click the Printer object.
2. Click Settings.
3. Click the Printer Driver tab.
4. Double-click the Titlebar icon.
The printer object is now set up to use a different printer driver. To customize the settings for this printer driver, see the
"Changing the printer properties" or the "Changing the job properties" sections of this guide.
Changing the printer properties
Printer properties describe how a particular printer is physically set up. Examples of printer properties include the amount of memory in a printer, printer-defined forms, forms associated with the printer paper trays, and installed printer patterns.
To set or change printer properties:
1. Right-click the Printer object.
2. Click Settings.
3. Click the Printer Driver tab.
4. Right-click the correct printer driver.
5. Click Settings.
6. Change the properties to match the printer setup.
7. Double-click the Titlebar icon.
The printer object is now set up to print a job. For information about how to print a job, see the OS/2 tutorial or the information folder.
272
IBM OS/2 Warp 3.0 and later Software Technical Reference ENWW
Changing the job properties
Job properties describe how a particular print job is printed. Examples of job properties include number of copies, print resolution, print quality, and orientation (portrait or landscape). Programs generally have you select a printer object, and let you change the job properties associated with a particular job by selecting setup or options buttons. Under certain conditions, it is appropriate to change job properties outside of a software program, such as when performing drag-and-drop printing.
To change the default job properties associated with a printer object outside of a software program:
1. Right-click the Printer object.
2. Click Settings.
3. Click the Job Properties tab.
4. Change the properties.
5. Click Save.
The default job properties associated with a printer object are now set up. For more information about how to print a job, see the OS/2 tutorial or the information folder.
Software Technical Reference ENWW IBM OS/2 Warp 3.0 and later
273
274
IBM OS/2 Warp 3.0 and later Software Technical Reference ENWW
6
Engineering Detail
Introduction
This section presents engineering detail for the following topics:
• PDF printing (Internal)
• Halftoning (Internal)
• Disabling Enterprise AutoConfiguration (Internal)
• HP Driver Preconfiguration (Internal)
• HP printers in terminal-server and cluster-server environments (Internal)
• Media attributes
• Network administrator software (Internal)
• Print server operating system migration
• Driver Support Matrix (HPSASDRV.MTX - Internal)
PDF Printing (Internal)
Many current and future printer products have or will have the ability to directly print PDF documents. PDF printing is driverless-printing and is accomplished by directly sending the PDF file to the printer. The file can be sent directly using any method that allows for sending data directly to the printer. NOTE: Printing a PDF file through Acrobat Reader©, or some other PDF reader, is not direct PDF printing because Acrobat Reader will convert the PDF file to the selected printer driver language.
The benefit of direct PDF printing is the ability to print PDF files without addition software or printer drivers. Direct PDF printing opens the door to true driverless-printing, which means a user can print a PDF file to any printer as long has he has a PDF file and the ability to communicate to with a printer. Driverless printing saves the user from having to go out on the web and download the current driver for the printer in question. In addition to direct printing, PDF files may also be printed using URLs. With the help of the embedded web server, a user can send the URL of a PDF file to the printer and the web server will retrieve that file and print it.
This file contains a list of issues wherein our PDF solution does not match Adobe Acrobat or wherein we have decided to match Acrobat but no longer match the spec.
1. White and Black points. Acrobat 4.0 and 5.0 differ in this area, but both seem to ignore, or nearly ignore, the settings of the WhitePoint. This may be because Acrobat is run on a screen and does not need to worry about white/Black points
(because the screen makes its own light). Anyway, our PDF solution reads and uses all White and Black points in the file, regardless of how far off they are. This issue arose when many tests that were generated by Wipro that had nonnormal White and Black points did not match Acrobat’s display. Once the White and Black points were brought into near normal values, our solution matches Acrobat. Defect 55515.
a. Visual difference – the affect of this difference is that the color printed on the page would be different from that seen on the screen in Acrobat. In many of our files, seeing slightly different colors on paper when compared to the screen is normal. With White and Black points, the color differences could be significant (the colors may not even be shades of the same color). It is our position that our solution is correct – we follow the spec and believe the printed out put is correct. If
Software Technical Reference ENWW Introduction
275
276
the users prints the file to the printer through Acrobat they will probably see the same output that was printed via PDF printing. b. Work around – there is no real work-around/fix for this issue.
2. Flatness operator. Acrobat ignores the flatness settings in the composition of all elements on the page (including vectors and text). We have decided to follow this same lead for our PDF solution, even though it does not match the spec. Defect 55534.
a. Visual difference – some of the curves printed through the PDF solution will be more jagged than what is seen on the screen in Acrobat. Our PDF solution follows the spec and also the PostScript intrepter that exists in our OZ based printers (the OZ PS also uses the Flatness operator).
b. Workaround – there is no real workaround here. PDF jobs that set the Flatness operator may look more jagged than what is on screen. NOTE: in most cases, the effect of the Flatness operator will not be noticeable.
3. Bad Widths Array. When a PDF file contains a bad width array for text, we do not match Acrobat. Herein, the firstcode or lastcode may be incorrect, or there may be too few or too many widths. In the case of too many, we use the array as was defined by the job. In the case of too few, we also use the array as defined the job, but we use the
MissingWidth for characters that do not have a width. In the case of files wherein the first code is negative, we use
MissingWidth/DefaultWidth for all glyphs. Defect 55527 and 51784. In these cases, Acrobat shows the characters much closer together.
4. Error conditions with Line Cap, Line Join, and setflat. Acrobat and Deltic are not consistent with printing errors when the values are out of range for these different operators and also their settings via the gs operator. For example, for
Line Cap, Acrobat 5.0 clips the value to the smallest value is the below the limit, but if it is above the limit it prints an error. We have decided to always print an error if the value is out of range. We will at least be consistent.
5. Acrobat incorrectly applies CTM changes to existing paths (defect 56662). If the PDF file defines a path, then changes the scale of objects by changing the CTM and then draws a second path, Acrobat applies the changed to
CTM to both paths (i.e., the first path gets drawn at the wrong size). The PDF spec and Postscript both state that the
CTM change should not apply to the first path. We have decided to follow the spec and PostScript and not apply the
CTM change to the first path.
6. Our PDF Solution maintains a stack. From our testing, we have found that Acrobat will maintain a stack of operands, even though the spec states that this is not supported. We have decided to support a stack of 10 elements.
This will allow us to print some jobs that would otherwise fail. We have noticed the Acrobat will accept up to at least
10,000 elements on the stack. We are going with a stack size of 10 until we find tests that make us re-look at this size.
If there are tests that need more than this to print, we may or may not change the size. a. If the job exceeds the stack size, then a PDF error page will print. The error message will be “Page Composition Error” with a secondary message of “Invalid Data”. b. Workaround – the workaround is to print the job through Acrobat.
7. Annotation placement. The Spec states that all annotations are to be placed at the lower left corner of the bounding box. But, Acrobat 5.0 places them at the upper left. We have changed our PDF solution to match Acrobat 5.0 and not follow the spec.
8. PJTF implementation. We have decided to implement PJTF wholly inside of PDF. In our first version, it will not be available to other personalities. a. NOTE: PJTF – Portable Job Ticket Format – is a Job Ticket format that Adobe created. PJTF was, as nearly as we can tell, created to be used with PDF jobs to drive a printing device. As of today, we know of no use of PJTF outside of PDF jobs. Therefore, it is implemented wholly within PDF. Also, Adobe seems to have abonded PJTF for a more widly accecpted standard called Job Definition Format (JDF). JDF is also a job ticket format, but it was developed and accepted by several companies. There are JDF solutions in the market place today.
HP is working on a job ticket, but at this time it is not known if it will be JDF or not.
9. 0 width StemV. When Acrobat receives a font that has a 0 width StemV, it changes it to 100. The spec does not state to do this, but Acrobat does it anyway. We have decided to match acrobat in this case. We will also change 0 with StemV to 100.
10. Colored patterns that do not specify a fill color, paint different from Acrobat. Acrobat is apparently initializing all color spaces to their initial values when a cs/CS command is executed. This causes colored patterns that do not specify their own color to paint in black instead of painting in the color that was active in the parent object before the pattern was called. The following decision was made: a. We have decided to follow the spec and use the color that was in place in the parent before the call to the pattern was made. The reason is we are not sure when Acrobat is actually setting the colors to black, and which colors are being set to black. Plus, we don’t fully understand all of the side-effects of making this change. Also, the way the code is implemented seems more correct. b. Visual difference –
PDF Printing (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
This issue would be seen as patterns painting in different colors. c. Workaround – At this point, there is not real workaround.
11. Font substitution when the font type is unknown. If the font type is unknown, our PDF interpreter has added intelligence to try and print the font anyway. In some cases, we will not match Acrobat because we are able to print the original font – whereas Acrobat had done font substitution. Test case: CIDFnt/Negative/FN50662.pdf.
12. Name length. The spec states that the length of a string is 127 bytes. Acrobat 4.0 and 5.0 both go to 500 bytes for a name. We have decided to follow the spec and keep the string length at 127. a. Visual difference – the users would see this issue because the job would fail with an error page stating “Page Composition Error” with an error description of “Invalid Data.” b. Workaround – the workaround for this issue is to print the file from Acrobat.
13. Incorrect /Length1, 2, and 3. When these lengths are incorrect, we print the files but Acrobat errors out. If the
Length fields for Type1 and TrueType fonts are not correct, Acrobat stops, but we are able to print the jobs. This is because we do not parse the font streams. See defect 59811.
14. 4-bit Indexed images. The test 99-02.pdf, which is a PDF CET test, prints the indexed images at the top of page 3 differently than Acrobat. This job has an indexed color space that contains only 4 table values. 4 of the 8 images are either 4 bit or 8 bit images, thus indexing to 15 and 256 respectively. Acrobat appears to be accessing uninitialized
RAM in these cases and is printing garbage colors. Our implementation is correct in that we clamp the higher values back to 3 (the Indexed color space is 0 – 3). For all color values larger than 3, we clamp them back to 3. Also, the
Color data in the 12 0 obj is ASCII, thus the 0000000fffffff are actually 0x30 …., thus the colors are variations of GRAY and not black and white.
15. Pattern Matrix Problem: Acrobat 4.0 on HPUX work stations, Acrobat 5.0 and the PostScript language do not use the Pattern Matrix that is specified by the job. They use the Identify matrix instead. Acrobat 4.0 on Windows and our
PDF solution use the Pattern Matrix that is specified by the job. Our PDF solution follows the PDF spec, but not
Acrobat in this case. Defects 61134 and 80834. a. Visual difference – some patterns would appear different to the user. Howver, in most cases, it would be difficult to notice the difference. b. Workaround – the user could print the file from Acrobat using a PostScript driver.
16. Shading Type 5 – For Type-5 Shading, Acrobat displays an error “Error in Shading dictionary.” Our implementation prints this correctly. Test case: GP50921.pdf. a. NOTE: In PDF, and PostScript for that matter, there are 7 different types of smooth shading. Shading type 5 is the “lattice-form Gouraud-shaded triangle meshes” type of shading.
17. CalCMYK has to be rendered as DeviceCMYK. For files with CalCMYK, acrobat shows an error. Our PDF solution renders using DeviceCMYK and prints the file correctly. (see GP50057.pdf). a. The spec states the following with respect to CalCMYK –“In PDF 1.1, a color space family named CalCMYK was partially defined, with the expectation that its definition would be completed in a future version. However, this is not longer being considered. PDF 1.3 and later version support calibrated four-component color spaces by means of ICC profiles … PDF consumer applications should ignore CalCMYK color space attributes and render colors specified in this family as if they had been specified using DeviceCMYK.” PDF Reference, Third Edition, Version 1.4, page 181.
18. Nested BT-ET is not allowed according to spec but this is supported by Acrobat. We follow spec. Test case
PM50493.pdf. a. BT-ET are the operators for Begin Text and End Text and surround text objects. Text objects are any set of text operators that draw one or more characters on the page. b. Visual difference – Our PDF solution would end the job with an “Invalid File Format” error page. c. Workaround – The workaround is to print the job from Acrobat.
19. DeviceN and Separation. Acrobat does not support DeviceN and Separation color spaces, it always uses alternate colorspace. Our PDF solution supports these special color spaces, which is correct. (test cases: GP50276.pdf and
GP50280.pdf).
20. Setting Dash Pattern and Font settings through the Extended Graphics state. Acrobat does not support setting the
Dash Pattern and Font settings through the Extend Graphics state, but our solution does. In this case we follow the
Spec and Acrobat does not. Test cases: GP50570.pdf, GP50580.pdf.
21. CalRGB with Whitepoint value 0 1 0. Acrobat shows an “Invalid Color Space” error whereas our PDF solution is able to print the file correctly. Test case: GP50366.pdf.
22. Base 14 font substitution. Acrobat substitutes fonts for Base-14 fonts, which our solution does not. (Test case:
FN50032.pdf). a. PDF defines 14 fonts that are installed in all PDF solutions. These 14 fonts are directly accessible by all PDF jobs without having to embed the font in the PDF job. Acrobat will substitute system fonts for these 14 fonts.
Software Technical Reference ENWW PDF Printing (Internal)
277
278
The Acrobat substituted fonts may appear slightly different from the actual 14 fonts used by our PDF solution. b.
Workaround – the user can try to print the file from Acrobat.
23. Vertical writing. Acrobat displays vertical writing that with text clipping incorrectly. Our PDF solution handles this correctly. (Test case: PM50692.pdf).
24. Border style annotation: All of the border style annotations have different dashed pattern arrays, like - dash pattern not defined, dashed pattern with phase, pattern with value [2 4] and width 7, and pattern as [5]. Acrobat uses default dashed pattern of [3] and width 1 for all the above cases. Also the dashed pattern having phase is appeared as solid border in Adobe Acrobat 4.0 whereas Acrobat 5.0 doesn’t show it. Test case: AN00046.pdf. In all of these cases, our
PDF solution prints these correctly.
Halftoning (Internal)
The LaserJet HP Color LaserJet 3500 and 3700 have subtle differences in how they handle halftone and color rendering of Red-Green-Blue (RGB) color data from print jobs: · The Trapping implementation on the HP Color
LaserJet 3500 is very slow (firmware only) so it is not on in the driver by default. Trapping is the feature you get in the software's Edge Control dialog, it reduces the effect of color plane mis-registration by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent color objects. On the HP Color LaserJet 3700 we have both trapping and adaptive halftoning in the Edge
Control software dialog. For the 3700, the Trapping features are in hardware and thus very fast, so the default is to have these features on.
· HP Color LaserJet 3500 has trapping but is not on by default due to performance - HP Color LaserJet 3700 has trapping and adaptive halftoning on by default. Trapping helps cover up color plane mis-registration. HP Color
LaserJet 3500 users will see the effects of mis-registration more often. Adaptive halftoning smooths the edges of text and line art that are halftoned while maintaining the quality of area fills. Oranges and greens typically fit into this class.
· HP Color LaserJet 3500, because of the host based RIP (Raster Instruction Process), does not support object typing
(ability to select objects by type, such as: text, vector graphics, or photos), but the HP Color LaserJet 3700 does.
Without the object typing, there is no access to Neutral Axis (gray) treatment or halftone treatments. The halftone treatments are usually global (all objects set similarly) so the differences for this are minor. The big difference to the user will be the neutral axis (gray) treatment. The HP Color LaserJet 3700 will, by default, render gray graphic fills with black toner only. This keeps grays neutral (no hue cast). The HP Color LaserJet 3500 cannot do this so its grays are a compromise. The HP Color LaserJet 3500 uses process black (CMY and K used) but is weighted to more K. This means that photographs will be rougher in the near neutral colors on the HP Color LaserJet 3500 and that graphic grays may have a cast (pinkish, bluish, or greenish grays). ·
HP Color LaserJet 3500 is PCL only - 3700 is PCL, PS, and PDF. ·
HP Color LaserJet 3500 is sRGB (standard Red-Green-Blue) only - HP Color LaserJet 3700 has a Vivid RGB table and device table, and supports multiple CMYK paths.
· Calibration is very different between these products. This can lead to differences in color stability over time.
(Content regarding Halftone, Trapping, Edge Control is from the 5500 software tech reference manual and the
Pantone/ICC profile document (provided by Victor Loewen)
The Halftone setting controls the selection of a device-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded in the printer firmware. The Halftone options, Detail and Smooth, affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You can independently adjust halftone settings for text, graphics, and photos.
• Smooth. This option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option for uniform and smooth area fills. •
• Detail. This option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors, or for images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Choose this option for sharp edges and detail.
The General Color Options settings are Edge Control and RGB Color. Edge control, which determines how edges are rendered, consists of two components: adaptive halftoning and trapping. Adaptive halftoning increases the edge sharpness of text and graphics while maintaining the quality of area fills. Trapping reduces the effect of color plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects. The following options are available:
Halftoning (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
•
Off, which sets Trapping and Adaptive Halftoning to Off.
•
• Light, which provides minimal trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On.
•
• Normal, which provides the default Trapping setting. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On.
•
• Maximum, which provides the most trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On. Settings under RGB Color affect the color treatment for all objects and determines how colors are rendered. The options are Default (sRGB) and
Device. Default. This option interprets RGB color as standard default RGB color space (sRGB), which is the accepted standard for many software companies and organizations, such as Microsoft and the Worldwide Web
Consortium. Device (sRGB). This option sets the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render photographs properly when this option is selected, you must manage color in the application in which you are working or in the operating system. Note If your software application converts text and graphics to raster, the
Photographs settings also control the Text and Graphics settings.
Neutral Grays:
4-Color neutral gray colors are those caused by mixing several colors together to generate a shade of gray. An example of this is a Windows menu or tool bar. The differences are also more noticeable in areas with very low amounts of color, where small differences can represent a relatively larger percentage change. Despite onboard calibration and other techniques that HP uses to minimize these small effects, very small variations in color are an inherent part of electro-photographic printing technology.
Note
Disabling Enterprise AutoConfiguration (Internal)
Use the following steps to modify the .INF file to remove the components that are necessary for Enterprise
Autoconfiguration (EAC).
This section applies to the Traditional PCL 6 drivers only.
Note
The .INF file should be modified only by advanced technical support personnel. Please notify the appropriate
Technical Marketing Product Manager if you receive a request that EAC be disabled.
Within the driver package .INF files for EAC-enabled drivers, the Installation section looks something like this:
; Installer Sections
[HPBF511I.PMD]
DataSection=HPBF511I_DATA
; NON EAC Copy Sections - Un-Comment to Disable EAC
;
CopyFiles=HPBF511I_FILES,LANGMON_FILES
;
; EAC Copy Sections - Comment to Disable EAC
; CopyFiles=HPBF511I_FILES,LANGMON_FILES,,AUTOCFG_FILES,HPAUTO_FILES
DataFile=HPBF511I.PMD
To disable EAC in a driver, simply make a comment of the CopyFiles that are indicated in the instructions in the .INF
file by preceding the command with a semicolon (;). The exact contents of the CopyFiles lines might differ from one driver to the next. Using the preceding example, the installer section for a driver that has been modified to disable EAC would appear as follows:
; Installer Sections
[HPBF511I.PMD]
Software Technical Reference ENWW Disabling Enterprise AutoConfiguration (Internal)
279
280
;
DataSection=HPBF511I_DATA
; NON EAC Copy Sections - Un-Comment to Disable EAC
;
;CopyFiles=HPBF511I_FILES,LANGMON_FILES
; EAC Copy Sections - Comment to Disable EAC
; ;CopyFiles=HPBF511I_FILES,LANGMON_FILES,,AUTOCFG_FILES,HPAUTO_FILES
DataFile=HPBF511I.PMD
The lines in bold italic typeface above show the required change.
The driver installed in this disabled case could result in no extra files being copied to the driver directory, and no
Autoconfiguration is performed on that printer.
However, if existing HP bidirectional communication software is installed and running on the target system, the
Update
Now button is enabled, and the user can invoke that functionality from the driver UI.
HP Driver Preconfiguration (Internal)
Network administrators can use the HP Driver Preconfiguration solution to preconfigure a printer driver before deploying and installing it in an operating environment. HP Driver Preconfiguration is most beneficial when configuring printer drivers for multiple workstations or print servers for print queues that share the same configuration. Two types of features can be configured: printer accessories and driver feature settings. The driver is configured to match the printer hardware so that gaining access to all of the printer accessories through the driver is enabled correctly (for example, for duplexing units and additional input trays). Most driver feature settings can also be configured.
The preconfiguration process consists of three basic steps: driver acquisition, driver preconfiguration, and driver installation and deployment. These steps can be accomplished in different ways, depending on the tool that is being used to define the configuration.
The configuration process for driver preconfiguration is supported through three distinct tools. All three are designed with the same basic UI controls for interacting with the configuration (.CFG) file, but are packaged differently, either to support established printer installation workflows or to leave the deployment and installation of the driver entirely up to the user. These tools are:
•
HP Driver Configuration Editor. The HP Driver Configuration Editor is a small standalone Windows application that the user can use to open the .CFG file associated with a particular driver and make modifications that are applied when that driver is installed on the target computer. It is intended for use in environments where there is an established process for deploying drivers or where the server platform is not Windows-based. To support any
Novell or HP Print Server Appliance (PSA) Point and Print environments, this is the preconfiguration tool of choice.
•
HP Web JetAdmin Driver Configuration Plug-in. HP Web JetAdmin provides a queue creation application that can be used to create printers on any Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 server or workstation. The plug-in is limited to Internet Explorer browsers. Netscape Navigator (TM) is not supported.
•
HP Customization Utility/Silent Installer. The Customization Utility features an install-time mode of HP Driver
Preconfiguration. IT administrators can use the utility to preconfigure the drivers for a printing-system software driver installation with the silent installer.
Detailed information about gaining access to and installing these tools can be found in the HP Driver Preconfiguration
Support Guide, which is available at:
http://www.hp.com/support/lj3700
HP Driver Preconfiguration (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
Lockable features
Five of the driver features can be locked to prevent end-users from changing settings:
•
Print on Both Sides (Duplex)
•
Print in Grayscale
•
Media Type
•
Paper Source
•
Output Bin
When a feature is locked, the selected default option is the only option that is available to users. Generally, the feature is simply disabled in the driver UI once it has been installed.
Note
Continuous export
The term "continuous export" refers to the ability of the driver to copy the last set of driver settings back to the working copy of the preconfiguration file. Using this feature, the exported values can be applied when a compatible version of the driver is used to upgrade the printer driver. For instance, if orientation is set to "Landscape" in an installed version of the HP Color LaserJet 3700 PCL 6 driver for Windows NT 4.0, then the orientation setting in the newly upgraded
HP Color LaserJet 3700 PCL 6 driver for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 is automatically set to "Landscape".
The continuous export feature functions transparently from the user's perspective and only works between drivers from identical models.
Not all of the driver parameters can be exported; however, the list is always the same for those that can be preconfigured.
The following table shows drivers and operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration.
Table 88: Operating systems that support HP Driver Preconfiguration
Driver Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT
4.0
Yes Yes Yes Yes HP traditional
PCL 6
HP traditional
PS
HP PCL 6 unidriver
HP PS unidriver
No
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
N/A
No
N/A
N/A
Windows
2000
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
Windows XP
1
N/A
N/A
Yes
Yes
1- This information also applies to Windows Server 2003.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP Driver Preconfiguration (Internal)
281
HP printers in terminal-server and cluster-server environments (Internal)
Windows Terminal Server, Citrix Terminal server, and Windows Cluster Server technology accommodates as many as 128 devices, or terminals, to share the resources dynamically on a terminal server. A terminal server eliminates the need for modems, network interface cards, programs, or complete operating systems on the terminals.
A server cluster is a group of independent servers running Cluster service and working collectively as a single system.
Server clusters preserve client access to applications and resources during failures and planned outages. If one of the servers in the cluster is unavailable due to failure or maintenance, resources and applications move to another available cluster node.
HP LaserJet printers and terminal servers
Terminals can include personal computers, so-called "dumb" terminals, printers, and other devices. Terminal clients connect to the terminal server through TCP/IP. Citrix Metaframe supports connection through TCP/IP, NETBIOS
Extended User Interface (NetBEUI), internetwork packet exchange/sequenced packet exchange (IPX/SPX), and asynchronous modem connections. In turn, the terminal server connects to a local area network (LAN) through a network interface card. For information about supported printers and driver versions (including a list of supported printers, recommendations for installing printer drivers, a description of terminal server configurations, differences between terminal server versions, and differences between remote client operating systems), go to:
http://www.hp.com/cposupport/printers/support_doc/bpl10248.html
282
HP printers in terminal-server and cluster-server environments (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
The following table shows supported HP printers and driver versions. Hewlett-Packard recommends that you download and install these drivers from the Web for terminal server environments. Hewlett-Packard and Citrix have tested the drivers listed in the table and are confident of their stability in Citrix MetaFrame XP Feature
Release 2 and terminal server environments.
Table 89: Printers supported in terminal server environment and driver versions
Printer
HP LaserJet 1000
Supported in terminal server environment
No N/A
Supported driver versions
PCL PS
N/A
HP LaserJet 1005
HP LaserJet 1100 and
1100A
Yes (printing only)
HP LaserJet 1005
HP LaserJet 1200 series Yes (printing only) and 1220
HP LaserJet 2100 series Yes
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.208
N/A
1.0 (and later)
HP LaserJet 2200 series Yes
HP Color LaserJet 2500 Yes
HP LaserJet 3100 series No
HP LaserJet 3150 series Yes (printing only; no support for multiple users printing at the same time)
HP LaserJet 3200 series Yes (printing only)
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.192
4.14.2500.18
4.0 (HP LaserJet 2100m and 2100tn models only)
4.30 (and later)
1.0.0.0
N/A N/A
197C to 197E (and later) N/A
4.3.2.209
HP LaserJet 3300 series Yes (printing only)
HP LaserJet 4000 series Yes
HP LaserJet 4050 series Yes
HP LaserJet 4100 series Yes
HP Color LaserJet 4500
HP Color LaserJet 4550 series
HP Color LaserJet 4600
HP LaserJet 5000
HP LaserJet 8000 and
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
8100 series
HP LaserJet 8150 series Yes
HP LaserJet 8500 Yes
HP LaserJet 8550 series Yes
HP LaserJet 9000
HP Color LaserJet 9500
HP LaserJet 4 series
HP LaserJet 5 series
HP LaserJet 6 series
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
4.13.3300.9
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.201
4.14.4100.13
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.207
4.14.4600.14
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.207
1.0 (and later)
4.3.2.201
4.14.9000.11
60.5.17.2
4.3.2.200
4.3.2.200
4.3.2.200
4.0 (HP LaserJet 3200m model only)
4.13.3300.9
4.0 (and later)
4.0 (and later)
4.50 (and later)
4.11 (and later)
4.50 (and later)
4.14.4600.14
4.0 (and later)
4.0 (and later)
1.0 (and later)
2.0 (and later)
4.3.2.20 (and later)
1.0.0.1 (and later)
60.5.17.2
4.0 (and later)
4.0 (and later)
4.0 (and later)
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP printers in terminal-server and cluster-server environments (Internal)
283
Avoiding blue screen
A recurring blue screen can occur when different combinations of drivers are used. For example, it occurs when an HP traditional PCL driver (versions 4.3.2.38 to 4.3.2.50) is installed on the server, and when an earlier HP traditional PCL driver (version 4.3.2.38 or earlier) or Microsoft Unidriver is installed on the client. Because the architecture of these drivers is different, the settings cannot be accurately reported when the driver on the server attempts to read the configuration on the client. The driver enters an infinite loop and eventually causes a blue screen on the server. To resolve this situation, make sure that the drivers on the server and client are the same type (either HP or Microsoft
Unidriver) and the same version.
An intermittent blue screen also occurs when an HP traditional PCL driver (version 4.3.2.38 or earlier) reads beyond an array boundary. Depending on the allocation of system memory and the load of the server, the few bytes read beyond the buffer may be an invalid page and a Stop 0x50 error results.
Finally, an intermittent blue screen on a Windows NT 4.0 terminal server occurs when the server runs out of memory as the driver is executing. To remedy this situation, install the most recent drivers.
Preserving settings during autocreation
Client driver settings might be lost during autocreation. This is a limitation of Citrix MetaFrame. Driver settings such as tray configuration and print task quick sets are not read during autocreation. Paper size and orientation are the only client settings that are read during autocreation. The remaining settings are determined by the default settings of the driver installed on the server.
However, if Feature Release 1/Service Pack 1 is installed on the MetaFrame XP server, a user can go into the
Properties of the autocreated printer driver and manually configure it for features such as optional trays, setting the tray configuration, installing the duplexing unit, and hard disk settings. The settings are saved to the user's profile when the user logs out. The next time the user logs in, the user profile restores the printer settings. This feature is available only in MetaFrame XP Feature Release 1/Service Pack 1.
Installing drivers
Whether the printers are connected to a remote client or print server on a network, or whether they are connected directly to the terminal server over a parallel port, a driver must be installed on the terminal server. The remote client performs no application rendering; this is all performed at the terminal server. A driver can be installed on the terminal server in one of two ways:
• a driver is installed directly on the terminal server. An administrator installs the driver directly on the terminal server, and the driver becomes available to all of the terminal server clients.
• a driver is installed to the terminal server by using Point and Print from a client. Such a driver is available only to the the client, even though it is installed on the terminal server.
284
HP printers in terminal-server and cluster-server environments (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
Terminal server versions
Certain differences exist between terminal server versions:
•
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 terminal server edition
• The Windows 2000 terminal server edition protocol supports local port redirection, whereas Windows NT 4.0
protocol does not.
• The Windows NT 4.0 terminal server edition only allows printing in the configuration where the printer is installed on the terminal server. It allows any direct connect or network connection.
• When printers are connected to the remote client machines, the remote client must share the printer on the network. The printer is then installed on the server as a network printer. Printing in this manner is no different from printing in a single-user network-connected printing environment.
•
Microsoft Windows 2000 terminal server edition
•
A client with a printer attached through a parallel connection is automatically detected when the client connects to the terminal server. If a driver for that printer model is available to the terminal server, the printer is available to the client. Administrators can reduce the risk of making "non-authorized" drivers available to clients by defining and following a policy to ensure that only authorized drivers are installed on the terminal server.
•
Citrix MetaFrame
• The same configurations that are used on Windows 2000 terminal servers are used for Citrix MetaFrame servers.
• Printer defaults are the same as the defaults for the Windows 2000 terminal server, with one exception: when a printer is connected through a virtual terminal, the default settings for the printer can be set and retained across sessions by changing the text in the comments field.
Remote client operating systems
There should be no differences in printing when using Windows NT, Windows 9x, or Windows 3.x. All printing capabilities are based on the terminal server.
Windows CE is usually found on Windows terminals. In a Citrix environment, using Internet Corporation for Assigned
Names and Numbers (ICANN) protocol, a parallel port on the device can be used by using the Add Printer wizard in a client session on the Windows CE client and choosing a network-connected printer.
Other remote-client operating systems, such as UNIX and MS-DOS, are supported.
Support
Issues with HP LaserJet printers in a terminal-server environment can be sent to the following e-mail address: [email protected]
Issues with HP DeskJet printers in a terminal-server environment can be sent to the following e-mail address: [email protected]
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP printers in terminal-server and cluster-server environments (Internal)
285
286
Printing in the cluster-server environment
Cluster service can monitor applications and resources, automatically recognizing and recovering from many failure conditions. When a system or application in the cluster fails, the cluster software restarts the failed application on a surviving server, or disperses the work from the failed node to the remaining nodes, so that users experience only a momentary pause in service.
The Microsoft Web site contains articles about cluster servers that provide necessary information for installing them.
The article Step-by-Step Guide to Installing Cluster Service is a good starting point for gaining an understanding of cluster servers and how to install cluster service. It is available at:
http://www.microsoft.com/windows2000/techinfo/planning/server/clustersteps.asp
This article contains valuable information and links to other articles that you should read before installating in a clusterserver environment.
Printer installation
Hewlett-Packard does not currently supply an installer (SETUP.EXE) solution for printer drivers or for printing software in cluster-server environments. The only printer installation method supported by Hewlett-Packard is that which uses the Add Printer wizard. The Microsoft article How to Set up a Print Spooler on Microsoft Cluster Server describes the steps required for installing a printer in the Windows NT 4.0 cluster-server environment. The article is available at:
http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q197/0/46.ASP
The article Print Spooler Support on Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Cluster contains information that is specific to
Windows 2000. The article is available at:
http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q228/9/04.ASP
Print monitor
An installation error can result when a printer driver is installed that requires a print monitor that another printer driver has not previously installed. The error message is:
"Printer driver was not installed. The specified print monitor is unknown (Printer driver for Windows NT 4.0 x86 could not be installed. The specified print monitor is unknown" in NT 4.0)
To prevent this error, first install the printer driver to the node that currently has the spooler resource online, using the
Add Printer wizard in the Printers folder on that node. This may require installing the driver to the other nodes in the cluster if the other nodes may become owners of the spooler resource. Because most HP LaserJet printer drivers share the same print monitor, one LaserJet printer driver should be adequate for each node.
At this point, it should be possible to install further printers to the virtual server without errors. Because the printer driver is now already present on each node, a prompt appears asking whether you wish to keep your existing driver or to replace it during installation of the driver to the cluster server. Choosing either option is correct, because you are installing exactly the same driver to the virtual server.
Simultaneous driver installation in cluster server and virtual server
You can install a printer driver to a node in the cluster and to the virtual server at the same time. The node printer and the cluster printer should have the same version of the printer driver. The Add Printer wizard might ask if you want to keep the existing driver or replace it with a new driver. Choosing either option is correct, because the same version of the printer driver is on both machines.
Printers for multiple clusters on one machine
It is possible to install drivers remotely to a cluster server from a machine that is not one of the cluster nodes. Run
Cluster Administrator from the remote machine used to install the drivers to the cluster. This makes it possible to move the spooler resource to node 2 after installing the drivers to the virtual server with node 1 owning the spooler resource.
HP printers in terminal-server and cluster-server environments (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
Cluster-server environment and bidirectional communication
HP does not support bidirectional communication in a cluster environment. Driver AutoConfiguration (using the
Update
Now button in HP traditional PCL drivers) and HP Printer Status and Alerts depend on bidirectional communication and are, therefore, not supported in a cluster environment. You can gain access to status information about the printer and print jobs sent to the printer by clicking the Printers folder and double-clicking the printer queue icon. These features are native to Windows.
Cluster-server environment and Plug and Play
Because the printer is not connected directly to the machine, the print server in a Cluster Server environment is a virtual machine. Therefore, no notion of Plug and Play exists for a printer in this environment. Most printers in Cluster environments are connected through standard TCP/IP ports (in Windows 2000) or LPR ports (in Windows NT 4.0).
Plug and Play is possible with printers connected directly to the nodes in a cluster, but it is not advisable to configure the cluster printers as LPT-connected. If the clustered printer is connected to an LPT port on one of the nodes, and the node fails, the printer is unavailable to other nodes in the cluster.
Cluster-server environment and Point and Print
All Point and Print configurations that are supported by Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 2000 servers that are not running cluster server are supported in the cluster-server environment. Clients that run Windows 98, Windows Me,
Windows NT 4.0, and Windows 2000 can print to a printer connected to a share on the virtual server.
One thing to consider when setting up a cluster server as a print server is that drivers added for vending to other operating systems must be added to the cluster once for each node that can own that printer. For example, if node 1 and node 2 can each run the printer, the additional drivers must be added to the Sharing tab of the virtual server printer driver when node 1 has the print spooler online, and then again when node 2 has the spooler resource online.
Because printer drivers must be available on all of the nodes that could have the print spooler online, the drivers must be stored on each physical node. Printer drivers are installed to the node that currently has the print spooler online.
Cluster-server environment and Jetdirect ports
HP Jetdirect ports are supported for printers served by a cluster server. The HP Jetdirect port type must first be installed on each node in the cluster.
When you install printers to the virtual server in Windows NT 4.0, it is not possible to create new ports. These ports must be created on each local node that can be configured to have the spooler resource online before you install the printer to the virtual server.
In Windows 2000, printer ports can be created during the Add Printer installation to the virtual server. These ports do not have to be created on each local node prior to installation of the cluster printer.
Cluster-server environment and LPR ports in Windows NT 4.0
LPR ports can be used for printers in a cluster-server environment in Windows NT 4.0. In Windows NT 4.0, TCP/IP printing must be installed on each node of the cluster in order to connect a cluster printer to an LPR port. Also, the port connected to the printer must be created on each node that supports that printer.
To create the LPR port on each local node, follow these steps:
1. On the local node, click File.
2. Click the Printers folder.
3. Click Server Properties.
4. Click the Ports tab.
5. Click the Add Port button and select LPR Port.
Software Technical Reference ENWW HP printers in terminal-server and cluster-server environments (Internal)
287
Note
6. Type the TCP/IP address of the printer and a description.
7. Click OK.
After exiting Server Properties, the LPR port should be available to the local node. After creating the LPR port on the local node, the spooler resource might need to be taken offline and brought online again before the port is available to the virtual print server. It is recommended that you stop the Microsoft TCP/IP printer service (TCP/IP
Print Server), if running, on the local node before stopping the spooler resource in the cluster.
Failover to another node
The Windows NT 4.0 Enterprise Server and the Windows 2000 Advanced Server support two nodes, but DataCenter supports up to four nodes. If a node that currently has the print spooler resource online is shut down or experiences a failure that renders it unable to serve the print spooler resource, the print spooler resource moves to another node, providing the print spooler resource is correctly configured for failover to another node.
The spooler resource can be configured to move back to the original node if it comes back online. Because print jobs that are served by the cluster server are stored on the shared storage device, they are available to all of the nodes in the cluster. When failover occurs, the node that brings the spooler resource online resends to the printer any print jobs that were being served when the failure occurred. This can result in one of the following outcomes:
•
A print job becomes incomplete at the time of the failure and is followed by a complete print job after failover occurs.
• If an entire print job is not yet spooled to the shared disk when a failure occurs, the print job may be incomplete even after the failover to another node occurs. In this case, the user must resend the print job.
288
HP printers in terminal-server and cluster-server environments (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
Media attributes
This section includes the following information about media attributes:
• paper sources and destinations
• paper-tray configurations
• paper-source commands
• media types and sizes
•
PCL 6 custom paper sizes
Paper sources and destinations
The following table indicates the standard and optional paper sources and destinations for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printers.
Table 90: HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printers paper sources and destinations
Paper sources
Paper destinations multipurpose tray (tray 1)
250-sheet paper tray (tray 2)
500-sheet paper tray (tray 3)
2000-sheet paper tray (tray 4) top output bin standard standard optional standard with the
HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn only standard
Software Technical Reference ENWW Media attributes
289
Paper-tray configurations
The HP Color LaserJet 3 series printers come with a standard multipurpose tray (tray 1), and two 500-sheet trays
(trays 2 and 3). In addition, the HP Color LaserJet 9500hdn printer includes a 2000-sheet tray (tray 4).
The following table indicates the paper tray configurations that are possible for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers.
Table 91: Paper tray configurations for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printers
Configurations
HP Color LaserJet 3700 Tray 1
Tray number
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray type
multipurpose tray
250-sheet tray
500-sheet tray
Standard/optional
standard standard optional
HP Color LaserJet 3700n
HP Color LaserJet 3700dn
HP Color LaserJet 3700dn
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 multipurpose tray
250-sheet tray
500-sheet tray multipurpose tray
250-sheet tray
500-sheet tray multipurpose tray
250-sheet tray
500-sheet tray standard standard optional standard standard optional standard standard standard
290
Media attributes Software Technical Reference ENWW
Paper-source commands
The PCL 5c escape sequence for paper source is "Esc&l#H" (the "l" is a lowercase "L" rather than the numeral "1").
See the following table for values of #. For example, "Esc& l1H" is the command for tray 2.
The PCL 6 escape sequence for paper source is "ubyte # MediaSource". See the following table for values of #. For example, "ubyte 4 MediaSource" is the command for tray 2.
Table 92: Paper-source commands
Paper source
Tray 1
Tray 2 (500-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Tray 4
1
(2000-sheet)
Auto Select
Manual feed
7
2
4
1
5
20
PCL 5c
Esc&l#H
1
2
5
8
3
4
PCL 6
MediaSource #
1
4
3
0
-
3
PS
MediaPosition #
1- Tray 4 is available on the HP Color LaserJet 3700dtn only.
Note
Media types and sizes
The tables in this section provide information about media features, media attributes, and paper-handling constraints for the HP Color LaserJet 9500 series printers.
The following table lists the features and attributes of various media listed under the Size Is: drop-down menu on the Paper tab. The list order can vary, depending on the printer and operating system. The list contains all of the following sizes, and might contain sizes from other drivers.
Table 93: Supported features and attributes by driver
Paper sizes
Letter
Width Heigh t
216 mm
279 mm
2
PCL 5 escape value
1
PCL 6
2
PCL 5 margin x,y portrait
"LETTER" 150,100
(8.5
inches)
Legal
Executiv e
Executiv e (JIS)
216 mm
(8.5
inches)
184 mm
(7.25
inches)
216 mm
(8.5
inches)
(11.0
inches
)
356 mm
(14.0
inches
)
267 mm
(10.5
inches
)
330
) mm
(12.99
inches
3
1
18
"LEGAL"
"EXEC"
150,100
150,100
"JISEXEC" 150,100
PCL 5 margin x,y landscape
120,100
PCL 6 margins
100,100
120,100
120,100
120,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
PS commands
5
"Letter"
"Legal"
"Executive"
"W612h936"
Software Technical Reference ENWW Media attributes
291
Paper sizes
Width Heigh t
PCL 5 escape value
1
25 A5
A4
Envelope
Commer cial #10
Envelope
DL (ISO)
Envelope
C5 (ISO)
Envelope
B5 (ISO)
Envelope
Monarch
Double
Postcard
148 mm
(5.83
inches)
210.0
mm
(8.27
inches)
105 mm
(4.12
inches)
110 mm
(4.3
inches)
162 mm
(6.38
inches)
176 mm
(6.93
inches)
98 mm
(3.87
inches)
B5 (ISO)
3
176 mm
(6.93
inches)
B5 (JIS) 182 mm
(7.16
inches)
148 mm
(5.83
inches)
(7.5
inches
)
250 mm
(9.84
inches
257 mm
(10.12
) inches
199 mm
)
(7.87
inches
(9.01
inches
)
250 mm
(9.84
inches
)
190 mm
(9.5
inches
)
220 mm
(8.66
inches
)
229 mm
210 mm
(8.27
inches
)
297 mm
(11.69
) inches
241 mm
26
81
90
91
100
80
65
45
72
PCL 6
"A5"
"A4"
"DL"
"C5"
"ISOB5"
"JIS B5"
2
"MONARC
H"
PCL 5 margin x,y portrait
150,100
142,100
"COM10" 150,100
142,100
142,100
"B5 ENV" 142,100
150,100
142,100
142,100
"JPOSTD" 100,100
PCL 5 margin x,y landscape
120,100
PCL 6 margins
100,100
118,100
120,100
118,100
118,100
118,100
120,100
118,100
142,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
"A5"
"A4"
PS commands
"Env10"
"EnvDL"
"EnvC5"
"EnvISOB
5
"
5
"EnvMonarch"
"ISOB5"
"B5"
"DoublePostca rd"
292
Media attributes Software Technical Reference ENWW
Paper sizes
Width Heigh t
PCL 5 escape value
1
17
16K
3
11x17
12x18
A3
8K
197 mm
(7.75
inches)
8.5x13
216 mm
(8.5
inches)
279 mm
(11.0
inches)
304 mm
(12.0
inches)
B4 (JIS) 257 mm
(10.12
inches)
296 mm
(11.69
inches)
273 mm
(10.75
inches)
(17.0
inches
)
457 mm
(18.0
inches
)
363 mm
273 mm
(10.75
) inches
330 mm
(13.0
inches
)
431 mm
(14.33
) inches
419 mm
(16.53
) inches
393 mm
(15.50
) inches
10
6 none
46
27
19
PCL 6
2 PCL 5 margin x,y portrait
"ROC16K" 150,100
"FOOLSCA
P"
"LEDGER" 100,100 none
10
"A3"
"ROC8K"
100,100
142,100
100,100
PCL 5 margin x,y landscape
120,100
PCL 6 margins
100,100
100,100
100,100
118,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100
100,100 none
"B4"
"A3"
PS commands
"W558h774"
"Ledger"
"w774h1116"
5
Software Technical Reference ENWW Media attributes
293
Paper sizes
Custom
(leading edge)
(other edge)
Minimu m:
98 mm
(3.86
inches)
Maxim um:
311 mm
(12.28
inches)
Width Heigh t
Minim um:
191 mm
)
(7.5
inches
Maxim um:
469 mm
)
(18.5
inches
PCL 5 escape value
1
101 4
PCL 6
2 PCL 5 margin x,y portrait
4
PCL 5 margin x,y landscape
4 4
PCL 6 margins
PS commands
5
true
1- The PCL escape sequence for paper size is Esc&1#A. The values in this column are for #.
2- The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte array(String)MediaSize. The values in this column are the values for
"String".
3- In Windows NT 4.0, this paper size is treated as a custom size.
4- For custom sizes, the HP traditional PCL 6 driver specifies actual dimensions - for example, for 8-inch by 9-inch custom size, "real32_8.000000 9.000000 CustomMediaSize".
5- The PS command for paper size is "PageSize".
Table 94: Supported input media types
Input media types (PS string)
Plain
Preprinted
Letterhead
Transparency
Prepunched
Labels
Bond
Recycled
Color
Cardstock
2
Rough
Envelope
Light
Heavy
Gloss
Heavy Gloss
Non-HP Heavy
Gloss
Tough Paper
(Gloss Film)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Tray 1
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Tray 2 (250-sheet)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Duplexing unit
1- Tray 4 is available for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 dn and dtn only.
2- Tray 1 accepts card stock at a maximum weight of 164 g/m
2
(45 lb).
294
Media attributes Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
PCL 6 custom paper sizes
The PS driver does not support user-defined media sizes.
The following table shows custom paper sizes that are available for the HP Color LaserJet 3700 series printers.
Table 95: PCL 6 custom paper sizes
Tray Dimensions
Tray 1
Tray 2 (250-sheet)
Tray 3 (500-sheet)
Duplexing unit
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Width
Height
Minimum
98 mm (3.9 inches)
191 mm (7.5 inches)
148 mm (5.8 inches)
210 mm (8.2 inches)
148 mm (5.8 inches)
210 mm (8.2 inches)
148 mm (5.83 inches)
210 mm (8.27 inches)
Maximum
306 mm (12.0 inches)
469 (18.50 inches)
296 mm (11.69 inches)
432 mm (17.0 inches)
297 mm (11.7 inches)
432 mm (17.0 inches)
311 mm (12.28 inches)
469 mm (18.5 inches)
1- Tray 4 is available for the HP Color LaserJet dn and dtn only.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Media attributes
295
Note
Paper type commands
For the command to work properly, at least one of the paper trays in the printer must be configured at the control panel for the paper type that is used in the command.
Some paper type options listed in the following table might not be defined in the printer driver.
Table 96: Paper-type commands
Esc&
1
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
Esc&
5
10
6
11
11
9
7
11
5
15
6
13
6
5
5
11
10
9
n#
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd
Wd Paper type
Bond
Cardstock
Color
Gloss
Heavy
1
Heavy Gloss
Gloss Film
Labels
2
Letterhead
Light
NHP Heavy Gloss
Plain
Preprinted
Prepunched
Recycled
Rough
Transparency
2, 3
Envelope
1- The correct command for card stock is "Esc&n11WdCard Stock", with a space between the "d" and the "S", and with an uppercase "S".
2- You must spell out the term "Gloss Film" in the string, although it is shown as TOUGHPAPER on the printer control panel.
3- You must spell out the word "Transparency" in the string, although it is abbreviated as TRNSPRNCY on the printer control panel.
296
Media attributes Software Technical Reference ENWW
Network administrator software (Internal)
Note
Novell NetWare (Internal)
This section provides important information about the Novell NetWare environment. It addresses the following topics:
•
Determining the server connection (bindery versus NetWare Directory Service [NDS])
•
Setting up an NDS-installed client to operate in bindery emulation mode
•
Using JetAdmin 3.4/4.2 to build Novell queues
•
Building an NDS queue
•
Removing printer objects from the Novell server
•
Vending Novell Directory Printing Services (NDPS) print agents
•
Making NDPS printer agents
•
ZENworks 2.0
•
Troubleshooting, notes, problems
HP LaserJet installers no longer support Novell queue creation. Client installations in Novell networks are still possible when a client machine is connected to a pre-existing queue. The Admin Install utility also supports the connection of a client machine to pre-existing queues.
Note
Determining the server connection (bindery versus NDS) (Internal)
Use the following procedure to determine the type of connection you have with the Novell server if you already have a
Novell client installed.
1. Right-click the red Novell icon N in the Windows system tray.
2. In the pop-up menu, click NetWare Connections...
A new window appears showing the tree and the server connection (you might be connected to more than one tree or more than one server). The type of connection also appears under Authentication State. If you have a bindery connection, the word "Bindery" appears. Otherwise, the words "Directory Services" appear, indicating that you have an
NDS connection.
If you are connected in bindery mode, only a server connection appears (not a tree).
Software Technical Reference ENWW Network administrator software (Internal)
297
Note
Setting up an NDS-installed client to operate in bindery emulation mode
(Internal)
These instructions apply to Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows
XP, and Windows Server 2003, with slight variations in the appearance of the menus.
1. Right-click the red N icon in the system tray.
2. In the menu that appears, click Novell Client Properties. A menu titled Novell Client Configuration appears.
3. Click the Location Profiles tab.
4. Type "Bindery" into the New Location Profile field, and then click Add. (Do not type the quotation marks. The word "Bindery" is not case-sensitive. See the following illustration.)
Figure 114: Novell Client Configuration dialog box
298
Network administrator software (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
5. The Location Profile Properties: Bindery dialog box appears. Click the Services tab. In the Services selection window, click Login Service.
Figure 115: Location Profile Properties: Bindery dialog box
Software Technical Reference ENWW Network administrator software (Internal)
299
6. In the Service Instance field, type "Bindery" (without the quotation marks), and then click Add.
7. In the Novell Login dialog box (see the following illustration), click the Bindery tab.
Figure 116: Novell Login dialog box
Note
8. Select the Active Authenticator check box.
9. Click the icon to the right of the Server field to browse and select a default server.
If the Server field is left blank, a server has to be selected during the logon process.
300
Network administrator software (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
10. To exit, click OK in this and subsequent windows until the Novell Client Configuration window appears, as shown in the following illustration.
Figure 117: Novell Client Configuration dialog box
11. Click the Advanced Login tab, select the Location List check box, and then select the Clear Connections check box.
12. The setup is now complete. To close the window, click OK.
13. Right-click the red N icon located in the Windows system tray, and then click NetWare Login to log on to the server again. The Location field appears. The drop-down menu contains two fields: Default (the NDS login) and
Bindery. Select Bindery, and then continue the normal login process.
14. When you have logged in, confirm the connections (see the "Determining the server connection" section of this guide), and make sure the printer is connected in a bindery mode.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Network administrator software (Internal)
301
Note
Using Jet Admin 3.42/4.2 to build Novell queues (Internal)
After JetAdmin has been installed, open the program, select the Options menu, and then click Preferences.
The Novell Client software must be installed before HP JetAdmin.
Figure 118: HP JetAdmin Utility window
302
Network administrator software (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
In the Preferences window (shown here), click Default Protocol and make sure IPX/SPX is selected. Return to
JetAdmin by clicking OK.
Figure 119: Preferences dialog box
If you are installing a new printer (or if you performed a cold start on an existing printer) that has a Jetdirect card or print server, click Device from the HP JetAdmin Utility menu bar (see following illustration), and then click New.
Figure 120: HP JetAdmin Utility window
Software Technical Reference ENWW Network administrator software (Internal)
303
Note
This opens the dialog box in the following illustration, which lists the media access control (MAC) address ( also referred to as the hardware address) of all of the unconfigured devices and resets Jetdirect cards and servers.
Print a printer configuration page to find the MAC address of the Jetdirect card.
Figure 121: New Device dialog box
Note
Find the MAC/hardware number that corresponds to that on the configuration page. This is usually found on the second page (EIO - Jetdirect Page) under the subheading HP Jetdirect Configuration, listed as the hardware address.
Now, click
Configure.
On some printers, the EIO printout is separate from the configuration printout.
304
Network administrator software (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
In the next window, type the name of the printer and a description or the location of the printer. Click Next.
Figure 122: General Device Information dialog box
Use the Netware dialog box to build either a NetWare Directory Services queue or a bindery queue. A third option is to bypass this window by clicking Next, leaving the default settings. You can then make the TCP/IP assignments without building a queue.
Figure 123: NetWare dialog box
Software Technical Reference ENWW Network administrator software (Internal)
305
Building a bindery queue (Internal)
To build a bindery queue, leave the fields on the right unconfigured, as shown in the following illustration.
Figure 124: NetWare dialog box
Select the Queues icon on the left, as shown in the following illustration. Click Change.
Figure 125: NetWare dialog box - queues serviced
306
Network administrator software (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
The Queues dialog box appears, as shown in the following illustration. Click Create.
Figure 126: Queues dialog box - Available Queues
The Create Queue dialog box appears, as shown in the following illustration. Type the queue name that you have chosen in the Queue Name field. Use the File Server drop-down menu to select the Novell server that you want to use, and then click OK.
Figure 127: Create Queue dialog box
Software Technical Reference ENWW Network administrator software (Internal)
307
The next NetWare window shows the server that you selected and the printer queue on the right side (see the following illustration). Click Next.
Figure 128: NetWare dialog box, displaying queues serviced
In the dialog box that appears (see the following illustration), type the TCP/IP information for the Jetdirect card/server.
Click
Next in this and subsequent dialog boxes that appear. In this example, a bindery queue with the name
"Test_Queue" was created on the server.
Figure 129: TCP/IP dialog box
308
Network administrator software (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
Building an NDS queue
Building an NDS queue requires a procedure that differs only slightly from building a bindery queue. Follow the instructions for a creating a bindery queue until the window in the following illustration appears.
Figure 130: NetWare dialog box - beginning an NDS queue
Instead of leaving the NDS Tree Name: Tree for the device to use field unconfigured, click the drop-down menu and select a Novell tree. The correct corresponding server context appears. You can manually change the content if it is not correct.
Click the Operating Mode icon in the left window for the mode you want to use. Then click the Queues icon on the left pane (see the following illustration).
Figure 131: NetWare dialog box - queues serviced
Software Technical Reference ENWW Network administrator software (Internal)
309
Click Change. The screen shown in the following illustration differs slightly from the bindery version of the same window. In this window, a tree structure appears on the left side, indicating the Novell Tree. Click the icon.
Figure 132: Queues dialog box - NDS queue
Type the queue name you want to use (see the following illustration), verify that the file server and context are correct, and then click OK. The remaining process is the same as shown in the figure titled "Create Queue dialog box".
Figure 133: Create Queue dialog box - NDS queue
Note
Occasionally, you are asked to provide a community name. The usual default community name is Public.
310
Network administrator software (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Removing printer objects from the Novell server (Internal)
A bindery queue for a Novell server consists of two objects: the print queue object and the print server object. An
NDS queue consists of three objects: the print queue object, the print object, and the print server object.
1. Find and open the NWADMIN32 program. If ZENworks has been installed on the server, you can browse to
NWADMIN32 through the following path:
NETWORK NEIGHBORHOOD > SERVER (server name) > SYS >
PUBLIC > WIN32 > NWADMIN32.EXE (indicated by a red icon).
2. Open NWADMIN32. If you are not logged in to the specific server where the file is installed, you might need authentication for that server.
Figure 134: NetWare Administrator window (NWAdmin32)
Note
3. Select all of the references to the printer that you are working on; either two or three objects are listed.
If the printer was set up in bindery mode, only two objects are associated with the printer. If the printer was set up in NDS mode, three objects are associated with the printer.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Network administrator software (Internal)
311
Note
With an NDS queue, the printer server object normally has "_PO" listed on the back of the name. Right-click the printer object, and then click Details. Click print layout (non NDPS) for the printer objects that are associated with the queue and their names (see the following figure, "Print layout of an NDS queue").
This can help you to identify which objects are associated with each other. Again, with a bindery queue, two objects are associated; with an NDS queue, three objects are associated.
Each object has its own icon.
Figure 135: Print Layout of an NDS Queue
312
Network administrator software (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
In the following figure, "NDS print queue objects (NWAdmin32)," the three objects associated with an NDS print queue are highlighted. To build a new queue for any printer, the three current objects must first be deleted. To delete an object, select the object, and then press the DEL key on the keyboard. You can also click the first object and simultaneously press the Ctrl key to select more than one item.
Figure 136: NDS print queue objects (NWAdmin32)
Software Technical Reference ENWW Network administrator software (Internal)
313
The next screen shows the two objects associated with a bindery queue. To build a new queue for this printer, the two current objects must first be deleted. To delete, click the object, and then press the DEL key on the keyboard. Click the first object and simultaneously press the Ctrl key to select more than one item.
Figure 137: Bindery print queue objects (NWAdmin32)
When all of the objects associated with the old queue have been deleted, reset the screen by double-clicking the container unit object at the top left of the window, which is the first icon in the list (the Tst-lab5 object in the illustration). The listing below the icon disappears. Double-click the container unit object again, and the refreshed screen appears. Verify that all of the printer-associated items are gone. If not, repeat this process until all of the associated objects have been deleted from the screen.
After all of these objects have been removed, you can build new queues. Be sure to use the same naming convention as before.
When finished with the NWAdmin32 program, close or minimize the window.
314
Network administrator software (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
Note
Vending drivers using NDPS (.INF install only) (Internal)
Follow these instructions to vend (remotely install) the driver to other computers when they connect to the NDPS printer agent.
To install HP drivers using NDPS, first create the NDPS broker and NDPS manager. See your Novell administrator to do this.
Loading the drivers (Internal)
If you do not want to vend drivers, go to the next section, "Making NDPS printer agents."
Using NWAdmin32, load the drivers into Resource Management Services (RMS) of the NDPS Broker:
1. Right-click the NDPS Broker object, and then click RMS, the resource management button located on the right.
2. Click Add Resources.
3. In the Resource Types field, select the operating system to which you want to vend.
4. Click Add. This opens the Add Resources window.
5. Click the Browse button and navigate to the location in which you want to install the drivers.
6. Select the correct driver .INF file.
7. Install the first driver. When the install window closes, click Add, and continue installing all of the drivers for the different operating systems you plan to use.
8. Click OK, and then click OK again.
9. When you are finished, click OK, and then click Cancel.
The server is now set up to vend drivers automatically when workstations are associated with the shared printer.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Network administrator software (Internal)
315
Note
Making NDPS print agents (Internal)
A public-access printer is not secure or controlled and is therefore not used in most cases.
Note
1. Return to the NWAdmin32 program.
The broker must be enabled and running before you download the drivers.
If you are unable to browse to the drivers you want to install, start NWAdmin32 with the following switch:
-
DisableTLSMGR
2. Highlight the root context object where you want to put the printer agent object.
3. Using the menu, click Object, and then click Create.
4. In the Create Object window, scroll down and click NDPSprinter.
5. Type the name for the printer agent (Example: User1-printer2-PA) and click Create.
6. In the next window under the field labeled NDPS Manager Name, click the small button to the right.
7. In the new window labeled Select Object, a list of printer managers appears. Select the one you want to use. If the window is blank, create an object (complete steps 1 through 5).
8. You then return to the Create Printer Agent window.
9. In the field listed as Gateway Types, click HP Gateway, and then click OK. At this point, an information window asks whether you want to load the printer manager. Click Yes or OK.
10. In the Configure HP Printer Gateway..., select either IP or IPX protocol (IPX protocol is the default).
11. A list of printers appears in the second field, Printer/JetDirect. Select the printer you want to associate with the printer agent. Click OK.
12. In the next window, Select Printer Drivers, three or four tabs appear that list the various Microsoft Window OS types (W3.1, W95/98, WNT4 and/or W2k). This is where you select the driver that you want to send to workstations that connect to the printer agent.
13. Select each tab for the OS type that is attaching to the printer and search for the name of the driver that you installed earlier through the RMS. The default is None.
14. After making your selections, click Continue.
15. An information window appears, informing you of the drivers you selected. You can either click Cancel and redo the selection or click OK to continue. Clicking OK closes all of the windows and returns you to the NetWare
Administrator Screen.
16. The newly created Printer Agent object appears at the top of the context list under which you built the object.
316
Network administrator software (Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
ZENworks 2.0 (Internal)
Note
Making user policies (Internal)
User policies are created to send the drivers and associate the policy queues with the printer agent.
•
Build an NDS queue for each user first.
•
You must use ZENworks version 2 or later for this process.
•
Create a user policy for the specific user, and then enable the printer policy.
If you do not see the Policy icon when trying to create the user policy, you must install the ZENworks support pack on the server.
1. Name the policy to describe its purpose.
2. Click Next to continue creating policies.
3. Click Create Another Policy.
4. When all of the policies have been created, click <finish>. You need a different user policy for each printer driver or printer driver configuration used.
Associating the queues with the printer agent (Internal)
1. When finished creating the policy, open each policy and select the NT User Printer Policy check box.
2. Click Details.
3. Click Add.
4. Select (highlight) the NDS print queue object you previously made for this user/group.
5. Click OK.
6. Click New Driver.
7. Click Clear Current Settings.
8. Click Select Printer Model.
9. Click Have Disk and browse to where the drivers are located.
10. Install the driver that you want associated with this policy.
11. When the driver has been installed, click OK, click OK again, and then click Cancel.
When you log on to the system, the printer driver should be automatically sent to the workstation currently in use. If the printer driver is being sent to the workstation currently in use, continue completing the remaining users. If not, a problem might exist with the ZENworks installation. For installation information, go to:
http:\\www.Novell.com
Click Get Support, and then click Knowledgebase. Leave the first item in the dialog box blank. Under No. 2, Select
Document Sets, use the drop-down menu to select TIDs & Manuals. In the field in Item 3, type "Installing
ZENworks" (not case-sensitive). Click Search Now. From the search results, select the most recent information about installing ZENworks.
Troubleshooting (Internal)
If an error message appears stating that you do not have the correct rights, make sure that you are logged in to the correct server with administrative rights. If you are, try refreshing JetAdmin by pressing F7. If you still do not have correct rights, log in to the server again. Be sure to select the tree, context, and server again to establish a good link with the server. If this fails, turn the printer off by holding down the green button (this button may be labeled Go or
Start), and then turn it on again. The printer control panel shows the message COLD BOOT. Turn the printer off, and then on again, and then rebuild the queue.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Network administrator software (Internal)
317
318
Print server operating system migration
The large installed base of printers and print servers in corporate environments, combined with the large user-base for these printers, implies that an operating system migration takes an extended period of time, often months or even years, to complete. Because of this, it is unavoidable that the corporate environment ends up operating with a mix of
Windows NT 4.0 and newer operating systems (Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows Server 2003) for an extended period of time.
A number of printer driver issues related to operating in a mixed-OS environment must be considered when planning a print server operating system migration from Windows NT 4.0 to Windows 2000 or later. This section explores these issues and outlines several strategies that HP recommends to support a mixed OS environment with respect to printer drivers.
This discussion is not intended to make specific procedural recommendations for executing a print server OS migration. This discussion is intended to help system administrators and IT managers understand the printer driver issues related to operating in a mixed-OS environment so that the requirements resulting from the recommendations outlined in this document can be factored into migration planning.
The topics discussed here apply to IT environments that are currently running Windows NT 4.0 on the print servers and clients, and are migrating to future operating systems for both print servers and clients. The Windows 9 x family of operating systems is not discussed in this document because Windows 9 x clients can be supported with Point and
Print equally well from any server platform. A basic working knowledge of shared printing through Microsoft Windows
Point and Print is assumed.
While much of this discussion is general in nature, all of the specific driver recommendations in this document apply to
HP LaserJet and Business InkJet printers and printer drivers.
Background information and terminology
Version 2 driver
With Windows NT 4.0, printer drivers were considered, generally, to be a class of graphics drivers. Due to the performance requirements of some types of graphics drivers, like display drivers, these drivers executed in kernel mode. A kernel mode process runs in a specially privileged part of the operating system that gives the process access to all of the system resources. Due to the nature of the privileges granted to kernel mode processes, a misbehaving driver can cause serious system stability problems, including operating system crashes. Microsoft refers to these kernel mode printer drivers as Version-2 drivers and this is the term used throughout this section.
Version 3 driver
In an effort to increase operating system stability, Microsoft determined that starting with Windows 2000, continuing with all future operating systems, printer drivers would run as user-mode processes. User-mode drivers execute in a protected part of the operating system just like all of the normal end-user processes and software programs. This protected part of the operating system restricts access to critical system resources to prevent processes from corrupting these resources, which results in an increase in overall operating system stability. A user-mode printer driver that misbehaves is only capable of crashing the process in which it is running, and cannot crash the whole operating system. Usually this is the spooler process or an application process, both of which can be restarted without having to restart the whole operating system. Microsoft refers to user-mode printer drivers as Version-3 drivers, and this is the term that is used throughout this section.
Version-3 printer drivers are the native or preferred printer driver for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows
Server 2003; however, all of these operating systems are also capable of running version-2 printer drivers. Many older
Windows NT 4.0 version-2 printer drivers are blocked in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 because they are known to cause operating system stability problems with these newer operating systems. These newer operating systems identify these older drivers and do not allow them to be installed. Refer to Microsoft
Print server operating system migration Software Technical Reference ENWW
Knowledge Base article 247196 for more information about determining whether a particular printer driver is blocked in newer operating systems. None of HP’s current version-2 drivers are blocked in these newer operating systems.
Windows NT 4.0 is capable of running only version-2 printer drivers.
The following table shows the driver versions that are supported by Microsoft for each operating system.
Table 97: Operating system and driver version support
Operating system Version 2
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003 x x x x
1 x x x
Version 3
1
Windows 2003 Server does not officially support kernel-mode printer drivers by default. This feature must be turned on in the registry and is not officially supported by Microsoft.
Point and Print in a mixed operating system environment
When using Point and Print, the print queue configuration is stored on, and managed from, the print server. Client computers get the print queue configuration and the printer driver from the print server. Changes to the printer driver on the server, or its configuration, are automatically replicated to the client.
In a homogenous operating system environment (all of the clients and servers are running the same operating system), the printer driver that is vended from the server to the clients in a Point and Print environment is the same printer driver that is running and controlling the print queue configuration on the server. In this case, there is no doubt that the client computer can correctly interpret the print queue configuration and printing behaves as expected.
However, in a mixed operating system environment that typically occurs during an operating system migration, there are situations in which client computers could be running a different version of the printer driver than the one that is running on the print server. In order for this situation to work correctly, the printer driver that is running on the client must be capable of correctly interpreting the configuration that was created by the printer driver running on the print server. (Microsoft refers to the data structure in which this configuration is stored as the DEVMODE, but for the purposes of this section, we refer to this as the print queue configuration.)
The following figure illustrates a situation involving a Windows NT 4.0 print server that is supporting a mixed client base of Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 2000, XP, or 2003 clients. Because the server is running Windows NT 4.0, it is running a version-2 driver and the print queue configuration is created by this driver. A version-3 driver has been added to this server for vending to Windows 2000, XP, or 2003 clients (Microsoft documents a special procedure to accomplish this which is discussed later).
When Windows NT 4.0 clients make a connection to this shared printer on the Windows NT 4.0 print server, it is vended the same version-2 printer driver that is running on the print server. Because this is the same printer driver that created the print queue configuration, there is no problem reading this configuration and all of the print jobs functions as expected. However, when a Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 client makes a connection to this shared printer on the Windows NT 4.0 print server, it is vended the added version-3 printer driver. In this illustration, the version-3 printer driver is not written to be able to correctly interpret the data structure which stores the print queue configuration and this does have an impact on printing functionality because the version-3 printer driver on the Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 client does not “see” all of the installed options as they are configured in the version-2 printer driver on the print server.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Print server operating system migration
319
Figure 138: Mixed driver-version compatibility
320
Symptoms of driver incompatibility in a mixed OS environment
There is no single set of symptoms to be seen when client and server printer drivers are not compatible, but common symptoms include the clients not being able to see the proper queue configuration with respect to installed device options and default settings. Other problems in functionality can include the inability to print in landscape or from a specific paper tray.
When an incompatible mix of version-2 and version-3 printer drivers is present in the environment, unexpected behavior can occur due to some of the more subtle behaviors of Point and Print that are not obvious. The following figures illustrate an environment that contains incompatible version-2 and version-3 printer drivers. This section examines examples of how incompatible drivers can affect printing functionality.
In the example illustrated in the following figure, there is a Windows NT 4.0 print server and a Windows 2000 print server. The Windows 2000 client illustrated in this figure is a laptop computer user who occasionally travels between different office locations for business.
In Event #1, at the home office, the Windows 2000 client makes a connection to the local print server. This local print server is running Windows NT 4.0 and contains only a version-2 driver for the printer in question. Suppose, for example, that this is the “HP LaserJet 4000 Series PCL 6” version-2 driver. The Windows 2000 client is vended this version-2 printer driver and because client and server are both running the same printer driver, printing works as expected.
In Event #2, the client takes a business trip to a remote site. While at the remote site, the client user needs to print and makes a connection to a shared printer. The server for this shared printer at the remote site is hosted from a print server that has been migrated to Windows 2000 and contains a version-3 driver, which is also the “HP LaserJet 4000
Series PCL 6” printer driver. Now, the client computer already has a printer driver named “HP LaserJet 4000 Series
PCL 6”, but it is a version-2 driver and Windows 2000 prefers to use a version-3 printer driver when it is available. So in this case, because the print server at the remote site has a matching driver, which is version-3, the Windows 2000 client downloads this version-3 driver and now runs this printer driver.
The connection to the remote print server silently upgraded the client computers printer driver to a version-3 driver.
While still at the remote site, the client and server are both running the same printer driver and printing works as expected. However at Event #3, when the client returns to the home office and tries to print, problems occur because
Print server operating system migration Software Technical Reference ENWW
the printer driver being used on the client is not the same as that being used on the server and these two printer drivers are incompatible with each other.
Figure 139: Introduction of incompatible printer drivers through a silent driver upgrade
The example illustrated in the following figure is similar, except in this scenario the client first makes a connection to a
Windows 2000 server with the version-3 “HP LaserJet 4000 Series PCL 6” printer driver. Initially, because client and server are both running the same printer driver, printing works as expected. However, in Event #2, the client makes a connection to a printer that also uses a “HP LaserJet 4000 Series PCL 6” printer driver. But the printer driver on this
NT 4.0 server is a version-2 printer driver. Because the client already has a matching printer driver that is version-3, it just continues to use this printer driver. If these version-2 and -3 printer drivers are not compatible, then printing problems occur when trying to print to this second printer.
Figure 140: Native printer driver preference with incompatible version-2 and version-3 drivers
Software Technical Reference ENWW Print server operating system migration
321
322
Migration strategies
What follows is the exploration of three different strategies for being able to support Point and Print in a mixed operating-system environment. The three strategies are not necessarily mutually exclusive but can in some cases be combined or partially used concurrently to ensure that all of the client computers are served with a supportable printer driver configuration. Formulating a solution based on these strategies involves examining the list of printers to be supported and the list of page description languages required for use on these printers along with other site-specific migration requirements, and drafting a plan by which all of the client computers can be served with a supported driver configuration.
Strategy 1: Use Windows NT 4.0 drivers to support all clients
In this approach we seek to avoid printer driver compatibility issues altogether by isolating the Windows NT 4.0, clients and servers, from newer operating systems, thus running a dual printing environment temporarily. This is accomplished by leaving existing Windows NT 4.0-based print servers in place to serve the existing legacy Windows
NT 4.0 client base and deploying new Windows 2000 or .NET print servers to support the migrated client base running
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003. As clients are migrated, they are reconnected to the new print queues hosted on the new Windows 2000 or Windows 2003 Server print servers. At the end of the migration when there are no more Windows NT 4.0 clients, the Windows NT 4.0 print servers can be retired.
This approach ensures that the print servers and clients are always running the same correct printer drivers, thus avoiding any incompatibilities that may otherwise exist.
Advantages of this approach include not having to do any additional work to the legacy NT 4.0 clients and servers and ending up with the proper version-3 drivers for all of the products at the end of the migration, and most importantly, all printer models and drivers can be supported using this approach.
Strategy 2: Use Windows NT 4.0 drivers to support all clients
Because Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 are capable of running Version-2 printer drivers, a simple approach might be to use Version-2 printer drivers to support all of the servers and clients. In this way version-2 and version-3 printer driver compatibility issues are avoided because only version-2 printer drivers are deployed in the solution. In fact, this is the recommendation Microsoft makes if driver incompatibility issues arise.
In general, this is a safe recommendation to make for version-2 PS printer drivers which are based on Microsoft’s PS driver core. However, caution is advised because, while HP’s version-2 PCL drivers are compatible with Windows
2000, they are not all compatible with Windows XP or Windows 2003 Server. The HP version-2 PCL printer drivers should not be installed on Windows Server 2003 servers, nor should Windows XP clients connect to print queues hosted from Windows NT 4.0 print servers that have only version-2 PCL printer drivers installed. “Installed” means that the printer driver running the queue on .NET server should not be a version-2 PCL driver. It is acceptable to create a printer on .NET using a version-3 driver, and then add the compatible version-2 driver for NT clients, however, as described in Strategy 3.
While this strategy has the advantage of simplicity, there are several disadvantages. Because of the restriction for version-2 PCL printer drivers described previously, not all printer products and page description languages can be supported. Another disadvantage of this strategy is the inherent risk associated with running version-2 printer drivers.
Finally, at the end of the migration period when all of the clients and servers have been migrated to newer operating systems, the printer drivers being used are all version-2 Windows NT printer drivers; this would definitely lead to further work to upgrade all of the version-2 printer drivers to their version-3 counterparts.
Also note that many older version-2 printer drivers cannot be used with this strategy because they are incompatible with Windows 2000, XP, and 2003, and are blocked from installation by those operating systems. Therefore, it is necessary to update existing version-2 printer drivers prior to deploying to migrated servers or clients.
Strategy 3: Use a mix of version-2 and version-3 drivers to support all clients
In this approach, all of the version-2 and version-3 printer drivers are installed on the print server that are necessary to support a mixed client base during the migration as is illustrated graphically in the following figure. As mentioned previously, these printer drivers must be compatible with one another in such a way that they store the driver configuration in a format that is common to both drivers. HP has compatible printer driver pairs available for most printers and page description languages, as described in the following tables. The information in the tables describes the printers and specific printer driver versions that can be installed together on a server in this manner.
Print server operating system migration Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 141: Using version-2 and version-3 drivers to support a mixed client base
Adding version-2 printer drivers for NT 4.0 clients to existing print queues hosted on Windows 2000 or .NET Server is typically accomplished by accessing the Sharing tab on the printers Properties dialog box and clicking on the
Additional Drivers button.
Adding version-3 drivers for 2000, XP, or 2003 clients to existing print queues hosted on a Windows NT 4.0 Server is possible but requires a special workaround that is contained in the Microsoft Knowledge Base article 263090 at:
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=KB;en-us;263090&
Please note that it is necessary to follow the steps outlined in the following referenced article ( Microsoft Knowledge
Base article, 318577) to accomplish adding version 3 drivers to Windows NT 4.0:
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=KB;en-us;318577&
If Windows NT 4.0 Server is to be used as a print server for this strategy, it might be necessary to update the existing version-2 printer drivers to conform to the printer driver version numbers listed in the following tables, "Compatible
PCL 5 and PCL 6 drivers" and "Compatible PS drivers".
For the newer LaserJet printer models, the version-2 and version-3 PCL drivers that are contained on the product CD and on the HP web site are based on completely different printer driver architectures and are incompatible for the purposes of strategy #3. As is noted in the following tables, it is necessary to obtain a special version-3 printer driver for these products. These special version-3 printer drivers are compatible with the version-2 printer drivers that ship with these printers. To obtain these drivers go to:
http://www.hp.com/pond/pnp
Table 98: Compatible PCL 6 drivers
Printer series
1
HP LaserJet 1100
HP LaserJet 1200/1220
HP LaserJet 2100
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.208
4.3.2.201
PCL 5 driver
None
4.3.2.208
4.3.2.201
PCL 6 driver
Software Technical Reference ENWW Print server operating system migration
323
Printer series
1
HP LaserJet 2200
HP Color LaserJet 2500
HP LaserJet 3200
HP LaserJet 3300
HP LaserJet 4
HP LaserJet 4 plus
HP LaserJet 4si
HP LaserJet 4V
HP LaserJet 4000
HP LaserJet 4050
HP LaserJet 4100
HP LaserJet 4200
HP LaserJet 4300
HP Color LaserJet 4500
HP Color LaserJet 4550
HP Color LaserJet 4600
HP LaserJet 5
HP LaserJet 5N
HP LaserJet 5si
HP LaserJet 5000
HP LaserJet 5100
HP Color LaserJet 5500
HP LaserJet 8000
HP LaserJet 8100
HP LaserJet 8150
HP Color LaserJet 8550
HP LaserJet 9000
PCL 5 driver
4.3.2.192
4.14.0.18
4.3.2.208
4.19.3300.3
4.3.2.200
4.3.2.200
4.3.2.200
4.3.2.200
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.201
4.20.4100.420
2
2
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.207
4.20.4600.430
4.3.2.200
4.3.2.200
4.3.2.200
4.3.2.201
4.20.5100.430
4.18.5500.420
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.207
4.3.2.201
4.20.9000.430
PCL 6 driver
4.3.2.192
4.14.0.18
4.3.2.208
4.19.3300.3
None
None
None
None
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.201
4.20.4100.420
2
2
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.207
4.20.4600.430
None
None
None
4.3.2.201
4.20.5100.430
4.18.5500.420
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.201
4.3.2.207
None
4.20.9000.430
1
No compatible drivers are available for printer series that are not listed.
2
Compatible PCL 5 and PCL 6 drivers are available for these printers on an HP Web site. To download these drivers, go to:
http://www.hp.com/pond/pnp
324
Print server operating system migration Software Technical Reference ENWW
Table 99: Compatible PS drivers
Printer series
1
HP LaserJet 1200/1220
HP LaserJet 2100
HP LaserJet 2200
HP Color LaserJet 2500
HP LaserJet 3300
HP LaserJet 4
HP LaserJet 4 plus
HP LaserJet 4si
HP LaserJet 4V
HP LaserJet 4000
HP LaserJet 4050
HP LaserJet 4100
HP Color LaserJet 4500
HP Color LaserJet 4550
HP Color LaserJet 4600
HP LaserJet 5
HP LaserJet 5N
HP LaserJet 5si
HP LaserJet 5000
HP LaserJet 5100
HP Color LaserJet 5500
HP LaserJet 8000
HP LaserJet 8100
HP LaserJet 8150
HP LaserJet 9000
None
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
None
None
4.0
4.0
None
None
PS driver
2
4.3.2.172
1.0
None
None
4.19.3300.3
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
4.0
4.0_1.30
None
4.1.1
None
1.0.0.0
None
None
None
4.3.2.201
1.0.0.0
2.0.0.0
None
None
2.05
2.0.14
PS 4 driver
2,3,4
None
None
2.0.0.0
1.0.0.0
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
3.08
None
5.00.2195.2307
PS 5 driver
4
4.3.2.172
None
2.0.0.0
1.0.0.0
4.19.3300.3
02.12.01
02.12.01
02.12.01
02.12.01
None
None
3.08
None
5.00.2195.2307
1.0.0.0
02.12.01
02.12.01
02.12.01
None
1.0.0.0
60.03.14.02
None
None
2.05
2.0.14
1
No compatible drivers are available for printer series that are not listed.
2
Version-2 drivers.
3
Compatible only on Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 2000.
4
PS 4 drivers can coexist with PS 5 drivers and are compatible with Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003.
Software Technical Reference ENWW Print server operating system migration
325
Frequently asked questions
What drivers do I have installed?
To determine which versions of a particular printer driver are installed on a computer, you can open the printer
Properties dialog box for a printer that uses that driver and click on the Sharing tab and then click on the Additional
Drivers button. Printer drivers listed with a check mark in the Environment column are installed on this computer.
Printer drivers listed as “Windows NT 4.0” or “Windows NT 4.0 or 2000” are version-2 printer drivers. Those listed as
“Windows 2000”, “Windows 2000 or XP” or “Windows 2000, XP or 2003” are version-3 printer drivers. The following illustrations show examples from the Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
Figure 142: Additional Drivers dialog box in Windows 2000
326
Print server operating system migration Software Technical Reference ENWW
Figure 143: Additional Drivers dialog box in Windows XP
Software Technical Reference ENWW Print server operating system migration
327
Figure 144: Additional Drivers dialog box in Windows Server 2003
328
The Additional Drivers dialog box shows which printer drivers are installed for a particular print queue. To determine which types of printer drivers are installed for all printer drivers, open the Server Properties dialog box from the
Printers folder (File -> Server Properties) and click the Drivers tab. Using Server Properties is useful because it lists the printer driver names along with the Environment and Version information.
Windows NT 4.0 does not have a Drivers tab in its Server Properties dialog box. Information about installed printer drivers can be obtained on Windows NT 4.0 by examining the following registry keys (for Intel x86 architectures):
•
HKLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Control\Print\Environments\Windows NT x86\Version-2
•
HKLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Control\Print\Environments\Windows NT x86\Version-3
I used Microsoft Knowledge Base article 263090 to add version-3 printer drivers to my Windows NT 4.0 print server, but my Windows 2000 clients are having printing problems.
It may be necessary to update the existing version-2 printer drivers on the NT 4.0 print server to versions that are compatible with the version-3 printer drivers. Refer to the tables in the "Migration strategies" section of this guide.
If no compatible version-3 printer driver is available, consider using a Windows NT 4.0 PS-based printer driver.
XP or 2003 clients connected to print queues hosted on our NT 4.0 print servers and the clients experience intermittent hangs/crashes.
HP’s version-2 PCL printer drivers are not compatible with Windows XP and Windows Server 2003. If a compatible version-3 printer driver is listed in the tables in the "Migration strategies" section of this guide, add this driver to the print server using the technique described in Microsoft Knowledge Base article 263090.
Print server operating system migration Software Technical Reference ENWW
Reference
For more information about operating system migration and related topics, visit the following Web sites:
•
Point and Print Technical Overview document:
http://www.microsoft.com/windows2000/technologies/fileandprint/print/pointprint.asp
•
Print Server Upgrade, Migration, and Interoperability document:
http://www.microsoft.com/windows2000/technologies/fileandprint/print/miginterop.asp
•
Print Migrator Utility – backup/restore print queues; move print queues between servers:
http://www.microsoft.com/windows2000/technologies/fileandprint/print/download.asp
•
Fixprnsv.exe – used to identify Win2K blocked printer drivers on qn NT 4 server:
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=KB;en-us;247196&
•
MS Knowledge-base article for installing version-3 printer drivers on Windows NT 4.0 Server:
http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;[LN];Q263090
Driver Support Matrix (HPSASDRV.MTX-Internal)
The status component determines which printer drivers it supports by consulting a file called the Driver Support Matrix
(DSM), which is named HPSASDRV.MTX. This DSM file is nothing more than an .INI file that contains entries of driver model names that it specifically supports, or specifically does not support.
DSM File Format
The format of the DSM file looks like this:
[Driver Model Name]supported=[0|1]
Each driver model name that status supports has an entry in this file. For example, the 8150 PS driver has an entry in the DSM file that looks like this:
[HP LaserJet 8150 Series PS]supported=1
The DSM can also have entries that specifically prohibit known drivers that status does not support:
[Driver Model Name, NotSupported]driverFileName,x.y.z=1
This type of entry is used by status to exclude support for a specific driver model name, by using a specific driver file and version. For example, the 8500 PCL drivers for Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, and Windows NT 4.0 are not supported because the printer drivers are not written so that status proxy drivers can hook the OS functions they call. Disabling support for these types of drivers is accomplished by having the following entries in the DSM:
[HP CLJ 8500 - PCL,NotSupported]HPCPCLA.DRV,1.0.0090=1;; windows 9x pcl driver is not supported
[HP CLJ 8500 - PCL,NotSupported]HPCPCLA.DLL,1.0.0090=1;; windows NT4 Kernel Mode driver is not supported
Software Technical Reference ENWW Driver Support Matrix (HPSASDRV.MTX-Internal)
329
330
Driver Support Matrix (HPSASDRV.MTX-Internal) Software Technical Reference ENWW
Index
% of Normal Size option in drivers 103
accessibility support in drivers 194
accessories 133 configuring 133
ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) compliance 31
Adobe Acrobat Reader 187 availability by operating system 187
Adobe PS 3 emulation support 137
Adobe PS printer drivers and fonts 137
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) compliance 31
autoconfiguration utility, driver 35
autocreation, preserving settings during 284
Back Cover option in drivers 120
bidirectional communication 187 availability by operating system 187
cluster servers, not supported in 287
Enterprise AutoConfiguration 36
operating systems supported 32
bins 114 custom paper sizes 114
operating systems and drivers supported 202
bitmaps, converted from TrueType 100 black, printing all text as 100
Booklet Printing option in drivers 96
borders option for pages in drivers 97
Cable connection dialog box, Windows 219
cartridges. See print cartridges
CD-ROM 184 in-box file layout 184
installing Macintosh printing-system software 254
installing Windows printing-system software 210
Index
Choose Setup Language dialog box, Windows 212
drivers and printers supported 282
installing drivers 284 settings, preserving during autocreation 284
Client Driver and Support dialog box, Windows 232
Client Driver Support dialog box, Windows 233
bidirectional communication, not supported 287
blue screen, troubleshooting 284
Plug and Play installation, not supported 287
Point and Print environments 287
troubleshooting installation 286
ColorSync profiles for Macintosh operating systems 250
command-line silent install for Windows 245
Configuration Page, HP Embedded Web Server 53
configuring 55 printer options remotely 55
Connection type dialog box, Windows 218
bidirectional communication support 32
Network setup dialog box, Windows 217
Printer connection dialog box, Windows 216
constraint messages 92 context-sensitive help 92
viewing with HP Embedded Web Server 51
Copy Count option in drivers 147
cover, back, option in drivers 120
Custom Installation dialog box, Windows 235
custom installation for Windows 234
custom paper sizes 113 driver options 113
331
custom preference recall support 196
custom Print Task Quick Sets 155
customer support for product 53
customer support, terminal server environments 285
destinations, enabling optional paper 134
Device Information page, HP Embedded Web Server 51
Device Settings tab in drivers 140
Device Status page, HP Embedded Web Server 52
dialog boxes, printing-system software installation 257
different paper sizes, printing documents with 170
directory structure, printing-system software CD-ROM 184
Enterprise AutoConfiguration 279
Macintosh, IBM OS/2, and Linux 249
document layout features driver support 196
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide 31 install notes 31 installing online 31
online, availability by operating system 187
Print Task Quick Set for use guide 155
double-sided printing options in drivers 95
Driver Support Matrix (DMS) file 329
autocreation, preserving settings during 284
availability by operating system 187
bidirectional communication support 194
cluster server, troubleshooting 286
conflicting versions, troubleshooting 284
custom preference recall support 196
332
document layout features support 196
Enterprise AutoConfiguration 35
Enterprise AutoConfiguration 36
HP Driver Preconfiguration support 194
HP Driver Preconfiguration support 281
Incompatible Print Settings (constraint) messages 145
installable options support 202
Novell NetWare, installing 315
object for IBM operating systems, changing 272
older, using with new printers 87
operating system migration 318
Point and Print installation 247
stream output mode support 193
terminal server installation 284
duplex printing options in drivers 95
duplexing unit 114 custom paper sizes 114
Index
embedded Web server. See HP Embedded Web Server
Enterprise AutoConfiguration 187
operating systems supported 187
operating systems supported 33
escape sequences 291 paper source 291
EWS. See HP Embedded Web Server
exporting driver parameters 281
Features dialog box, Windows 229
file layout for printing-system software CD-ROM 184
firmware 69 determining current level 69 downloading 69
First Page option in drivers 111
Flip Pages Up option in drivers 95
Font DIMM option in drivers 135
Font Settings options in drivers 100 fonts 100
configuring for watermarks 107
guides. See documentation
availability by operating system 187
operating systems supported 195
Index
unidrivers (WIndows 2000, XP, and Server 2003) 144
HP Driver Preconfiguration 194 driver support 194
operating systems and drivers supported 281
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide 31
HP Jetdirect ports, cluster server support 287
HP LaserJet Screen Font Installer 263
HP LaserJet Utility 187 availability by operating system 187
HP Network Registry Agent (HPNRA) 35
HP Software License Agreement dialog box, Windows 215
HP Web JetAdmin 187 availability by operating system 187
Driver Configuration Plugin 280
operating systems supported 89
HP Web Registration 187 availability by operating system 187
HPNRA (HP Network Registry Agent) 35
changing printer drivers in the printer object 272
installing printer software 270
properties, changing printer 272
Identify Printer dialog box, Windows 222
image of printer in drivers 109
Include types in application source list option in drivers 136
Incompatible Print Settings (constraint) messages 145
Information tab, HP Embedded Web Server 51
input trays. See trays
Customization Utility for Windows 245
dialog boxes, Mac OS Classic 257
IBM OS/2 printing-system software 270
333
Macintosh printing-system software 254
system requirements for Macintosh, IBM OS/2, and
system requirements for Windows operating systems
Windows printing-system software 210
Installation Type dialog box, Windows 228
installers 187 availability by operating system 187
JetAdmin. See HP Web JetAdmin
Jetdirect ports, cluster server support 287
landscape orientation in drivers 164
landscape orientation option in drivers 95
Choose Setup Language dialog box, Windows 212
localization of software components 189
LaserJet Utility. See HP LaserJet Utility
license agreement dialog box, Windows 215
links, HP Embedded Web Server 53
printer support Web site 249 system requirements 249
localization, software components 189
lockable features, drivers 281
LPR commands 75 firmware updates 75
Macintosh operating systems 184
dialog boxes, Mac OS Classic printing-system software installation 257
dialog boxes, Mac OS X printing-system software installation 266
directory structure, printing-system software CD-ROM
files and folders added by installation 256
HP LaserJet Utility 250 install notes 250
installing printing-system software 254
334
setting up printers with Mac OS X 255
uninstalling printing-system software 256
manuals. See documentation media. See paper
information about total installed 136
installable options support 183
installable options support 202
installation requirements for Macintosh, IBM OS/2, and
installation requirements for Windows operating systems 205
messages, Incompatible Print Settings (constraint) 145
migration, operating system 318
models, HP LaserJet 3700 printer 24
multipurpose tray. See trays
NDPS 315 installing drivers 315
NetWare. See Novell NetWare operating systems
network 193 bidirectional communication support 193
Windows printing-system software installation 210
Network Configuration Options dialog box, Windows 225
Network setup dialog box, Windows 217
nodes, cluster server 286 defined 286
Plug and Play installation 287
Point and Print environments 287
troubleshooting installation 286
Novell NetWare operating systems 32 bidirectional communication support 32
bindery versus NDS connection 297
Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 33
HP JetAdmin, building queues 302
installing drivers using NDPS 315 loading drivers 315
Printer Status and Alerts support 34
queue creation, not supported 297
Index
online documentation. See documentation online help. See help
bidirectional communication support 194
bidirectional communication support 32
custom preference recall support 196 document layout features support 196
Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 33
HP Driver Preconfiguration support 194
installable options support 202
Printer Status and Alerts support 34
software component localization 189
stream output mode support 193
optional paper destinations 134
Optional Paper Sources options in drivers 134
ordering software CD-ROMs through the Web 185
orientation options in drivers 95
OS/2. See IBM operating systems
Other Pages option in drivers 111
Page Order option in drivers 98
Pages per Sheet option in drivers 97 paper 97 covers, booklet 97
First Page option in drivers 111
First Page option in drivers 160
Include types in application source list option 136
paper handling 24 printer features 24
Paper Handling Options in drivers 133
Index
paper trays. See trays
parallel connections, supported 193
bidirectional communication support 194
custom preference recall support 196 document layout features support 196
escape sequence for paper source 291
features for Windows 2000, XP, and Server 2003 144
installable options support 202
operating system migration 318
stream output mode support 193
bidirectional communication support 194
document layout features support 196
features for Windows 2000, XP, and Server 2003 144
HP Driver Preconfiguration support 281
installable options support 202
operating system migration 318
operating systems supported 187
stream output mode support 193
335
PDEs (Printer Dialog Extensions) 250
PDF files, command line printing 78
Percentage of Normal Size option in drivers 103
Plug and Play installation, not supported for cluster servers 287
Point and Print installation 186
operating system migration 319
Windows printing-system software 247
port selection dialog box, Windows 218
portrait orientation option in drivers 95
PPD (PS Printer Description) files 187
print cartridges 24 printer features 24
print controls support in drivers 197
Print Document On option in drivers 170
Print Document On options in drivers 102
Print job management dialog box, Windows 220
Print on Both Sides option in drivers 95
Print Optimizations option 149
Print Page Borders option in drivers 97
Print Quality options in drivers 98
operating systems supported 196
Printer connection dialog box, Windows 216
Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs) 250
printer drivers. See drivers
Printer Model information in driver 131
Printer Name dialog box, Windows 230
Printer Sharing dialog box, Windows 231
Printer Status and Alerts 34 operating systems supported 34
HP Jetdirect Administrator's Guide 31 install notes 31
license agreement dialog box, Windows 215
operating systems supported 29
regional and language versions 185
software component localization 189
bidirectional communication support 194
336
custom preference recall support 196
document layout features support 196
features for Windows 2000, XP, and Server 2003 144
HP Driver Preconfiguration support 281
installable options support 202
operating systems supported 187
stream output mode support 193
PS Printer Description (PPD) files 187
Quick Sets. See Print Task Quick Sets
Ready to Install dialog box, Windows 234
Recommended Network Setup dialog box, Windows 221
regional versions for printing-system software 185
remote firmware update 69 description 69 determining current firmware level 69 downloading 69
RFU. See remote firmware update
Scale to Fit option in drivers 103
Screen Fonts installer, Macintosh 263
screen-readable documentation 31
Select printer dialog box, Windows 224
Send TrueType as Bitmaps option in drivers 150
bidirectional communication, not supported 287
blue screen, troubleshooting 284
Index
Plug and Play installation, not supported 287
Point and Print environments 287
troubleshooting installation 286
blue screen, troubleshooting 284
defined 282 drivers and printers supported 282
installing drivers 284 settings, preserving during autocreation 284
technical support, by e-mail 285 versions 285
Set Network Communication Mode dialog box, Windows 226
custom preference recall support 196
preserving during autocreation 284
Settings tab, HP Embedded Web Server 54
shading, configuring for watermarks 174
silent installer for Windows 245
software. See printing-system software
Source is options in drivers 116
Source Is options in drivers 136
stream output mode support 193
technical support, terminal server environments 285
blue screen, troubleshooting 284
drivers and printers supported 282
operating systems supported 29
settings, preserving during autocreation 284
technical support, by e-mail 285 versions 285
text, printing all as black 100
Index
installable options support 202
operating systems and drivers supported 201
cluster server installation 286
TrueType, sending as bitmaps 100
two-sided printing options in drivers 95
Type Is options in drivers 117
Typical Installation dialog boxes, Windows 210
operating systems supported 187
uninstalling Macintosh printing-system software 256
updating firmware remotely. See remote firmware update
user policies for Novell NetWare operating systems 317
version-2 drivers 318 version-3 drivers 318
virtual servers 286 cluster node installation 286
Watermarks options in drivers 104
Web JetAdmin. See HP Web JetAdmin
cluster server information 286
operating system migration 329
Welcome dialog box, Windows 214
bidirectional communication support 32
custom installation, printing-system software 234
dialog boxes, Typical Installation 210
directory structure, printing-system software CD-ROM
driver features for 2000, XP, and Server 2003 144
337
Enterprise AutoConfiguration support 33
HP Driver Preconfiguration support 281
installing printer software 210
PCL 6 and PCL 5c driver features 91
Point and Print installation 247
Printer Status and Alerts support 34
printer support for Windows 3.1x 205
338 Index
© 2003 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
www.hp.com
Stiahnuť
Verejný odkaz bol aktualizovaný
Verejný odkaz na váš chat bol aktualizovaný. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Verejný odkaz na dokument
Reklama
